ba_reg_d_gb

303
REG - D™ REG - D™ Operating Manual Operating Manual REG-DRelay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring Issue 12.02.2009/03 Issue GB Version 02.2009 Software Version C O M 1 A U T O M E N U E S C F 1 F 2 F 3 F 4 F 5 l o c a l r e m o t e R E G - D

description

OLTC

Transcript of ba_reg_d_gb

Page 1: ba_reg_d_gb

1

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Operating ManualREG-D™ Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring

Issue 12.02.2009/03

Issue GBVersion 02.2009

Software Version

� � � �� � � � � � � ��

� �

� �

� �

� � � �

� � � � � �

� � � � � � �

Page 2: ba_reg_d_gb

2

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

REG-D™ Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring

Operating ManualIssue 12.02.2009

Copyright 2009 by A. Eberle GmbH & Co. KG.All rights reserved.

Published by:

A. Eberle GmbH & Co. KG

Aalener Straße 30/32

90441 Nuremberg, Germany

Tel: +49 (0) 911 / 62 81 08 - 0

Fax No.: +49 (0) 911 / 66 66 64

e-mail: [email protected]

Internet: www.a-eberle.de, www.regsys.de

The company A. Eberle GmbH & Co. KG cannot be held liable for any damages or losses resulting from printing errors or changes in this operating manual.

Furthermore, A. Eberle GmbH & Co. KG does not assume responsibility for any damages and losses resulting from defective devices or from devices altered by the user.

Page 3: ba_reg_d_gb

3

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Table of Contents

1 Warnings and Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

2 Scope of Delivery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

3 Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123.1 Plug-in modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

3.2 Connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

3.4 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203.4.1 Block diagram of socket connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203.4.2 Socket connector 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223.4.3 Socket connector 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243.4.4 Socket connector 3; (Measuring voltage, auxiliary voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283.4.5 Socket connector 4; (measuring current input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293.4.6 Socket connector 5; (tap changing via feature T1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303.4.7 Socket connector 6; (analogue inputs / outputs; interfaces) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333.4.8 Interface COM 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

3.5 Installation in the mounting rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

3.6 Wall-mounted housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373.6.1 Wall-mounted housing, type 30 MW, feature B02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373.6.2 Wall-mounted housing, type 30 MW, feature B03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373.6.3 Control panel mounting enclosure, type 30 MW, feature B05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383.6.4 Control panel mounting enclosure, type 49 MW, feature B06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383.6.5 Wall-mounted housing, type 49 MW, feature B07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393.5.1 19” mounting rack, feature B92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

3.7 Pin assignment for types B05, B06 and B07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

4 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434.1 The front panel operator interface of the REG-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434.1.1 Display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444.1.2 Function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454.1.3 Plug connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

4.2 Operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

4.3 Selecting the display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

4.4 Lamp check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

4.5 Resetting fault signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

4.6 Operating the Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Page 4: ba_reg_d_gb

4

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

5 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595.1 Regulator mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

5.2 Transducer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

5.3 Recorder mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

5.4 Statistics mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

5.5 Paragramer mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

5.6 Choosing the language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

5.7 Setpoint value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

5.8 Permissible regulative deviation Xwz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

5.9 Time behaviour. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

5.10 Backward high-speed switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

5.11 Tap-changer running time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

5.12 Knx transformer mounting ratios and transformer connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

5.13 Setting the nominal current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

5.14 Inhibit low limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

5.15 Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

5.16 Short description of the individual limit values, the setpoint values and the permissible regulative deviation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

6 Basic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876.1.2 Station name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .886.1.3 Setting the time/date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .896.1.4 LCD contrast (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .896.1.5 Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .906.1.6 Deleting recorder data (resetting the measured value memory). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .916.1.7 Deleting tap-change sums (resetting the tap-counter to zero). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .916.1.8 Actual value correction of the measuring voltage UE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .926.1.9 Actual value correction of the measuring current IE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

6.2 RS-232 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936.2.1 COM 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .936.2.2 COM 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

6.3 E-LAN (Energy-Local Area Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

6.4 PAN-D voltage monitoring unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

6.5 Status (actual ID data of the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring). . . . . . 99

Page 5: ba_reg_d_gb

5

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7 Parameterisation of the REG-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027.1 Permissible regulative deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

7.2 Time behaviour (regulation behaviour) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037.2.1 Time factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037.2.2 Time program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047.2.3 Trend memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

7.3 Setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057.3.1 1st setpoint value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057.3.2 Further setpoint values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

7.4 Programs (parameters for parallel transformer regulation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077.4.1 Selection of the parallel programs (regulation programs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077.4.2 Parameters for the parallel program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087.2.2 Time program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047.4.3 Current influence (line-drop compensation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107.4.4 LDC parameter R (line-drop compensation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107.4.5 LDC parameter X (line-drop compensation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

7.5 Gradient (U/I characteristic). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

7.6 Limitation (U/I characteristic). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

7.7 < U Undervoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

7.8 > U Overvoltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

7.9 > I, < Limit (upper and lower current limits). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

7.10 Trigger inhibit high (highest limit value of the voltage). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

7.11 High-speed switching during undervoltage/overvoltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147.11.1 High-speed switching when undervoltage occurs (RAISE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147.11.2 High-speed switching when overvoltage occurs (LOWER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

7.12 Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring inhibit low when undervoltage occurs . . . 115

7.13 Time delays (limit signals) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157.13.1 Time Delay > U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157.13.2 Time delay < U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167.13.3 Time delay > I, < I limit value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167.13.4 Time delay trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167.13.5 Time delay forward high-speed switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177.13.6 Time delay backward high-speed switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177.13.7 Time delay inhibit low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Page 6: ba_reg_d_gb

6

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.14 Add-Ons (Relay behaviour) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187.14.1 Overview of the Add-Ons menus numbers 1 to 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1187.14.2 Maximum time TC in operation (motor drive running time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1207.14.3 Manual/Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1217.14.4 Tap-changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1227.14.5 Self-Conduction of the operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1237.14.6 Current Display (of the Transformer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1237.14.7 LCD saver (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1247.14.8 Regulator mode: large display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1247.14.9 Language selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1257.14.10 Parallel Program Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1267.14.11 Up/down relay on time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1267.14.12 AUTO(MATIC) LOCK in the event of an E-LAN error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1277.14.13 Setpoint adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1277.14.14 Creeping net breakdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1287.14.15 Limit base (reference value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1297.14.16 Setting the Relay to inhibit low if <I or >I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1307.14.17 Maximum tap difference (monitoring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1307.14.18 PARAGRAMER activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

7.15 Transformer configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317.15.1 Transformer configuration voltage (conductor connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1327.15.2 Transformer mounting ratio for the voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1347.15.3 Transformer mounting current (conductor connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1347.15.4 Transformer mounting current (conversion 1 A / 5 A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1357.15.5 Transformer mounting ratio for the current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

7.16 Input assignments (binary inputs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

7.17 Relay assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

7.18 LED assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

8 Measurement Value Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1438.1 Setting the simulated voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

8.2 Setting the simulated current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

8.3 Setting the simulated phase angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

8.4 Setting the simulated tap-change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

9 Parallel Operation of Transformers with REG-D™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1479.1 Connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

9.2 Programs for parallel operation and their prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1519.2.1 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1519.2.2 Preparing manual activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1539.2.3 Preparing automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160

9.3 Parallel operation using the “Master-Slave-Independent (MSI)” procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709.3.1 Trouble-shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181

Page 7: ba_reg_d_gb

7

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

10 Resistance Measuring Equipment for Tap-Changers with Resistance-Coded Tap-Change Signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

10.1 Error detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

10.2 Level detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

10.3 Connection options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

11 mA inputs, mA outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18711.1 Analogue inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

11.2 Analogue outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

12 Updating the Operating Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20912.1 Preparing the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21012.1.1 Windows NT/2000/XP operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

12.2 Starting the bootstrap loader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

13 Updating Analogue Inputs, Outputs, Tap-Change Potentiometer Input. . . . . . . . . . 215

14 Maintenance and Current Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21714.1 Cleaning information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

14.2 Changing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

14.3 Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

14.4 REG-D current consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

15 Storage Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

16 Background Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22116.1 Regulator mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

16.2 Command variable W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22216.2.1 Fixed command variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22216.2.2 Variable command variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22316.2.3 Current-dependent setpoint value increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

16.3 Summary and Examples for Current Influencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

16.4 Regulative deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23316.4.1 Regulative deviation Xw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23316.4.2 Permissible regulative deviation Xwz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23316.4.3 Displaying the permissible regulative deviation Xw. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23416.4.4 Setting the permissible regulative deviation Xwz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

16.5 Monitoring extreme operation values (faults) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23516.5.1 Limit signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Page 8: ba_reg_d_gb

8

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

16.6 Add-Ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24016.6.1 High-speed switching Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24016.6.2 Relay inhibit low function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24116.6.3 Measuring the “Creeping Net Breakdown” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24216.6.4 Add-On: monitoring the “maximum tap-change difference” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24416.6.5 Add-On: monitoring the tap-changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244

16.7 Time behaviour of the Relay when a control command is output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24516.7.1 Determining the reaction delay tv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24716.7.2 Integrated time program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25016.7.3 Trend memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25116.7.4 “Const” time program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25216.7.5 Setting the time factor Ft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257

16.8 E-LAN (Energy Local Area Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

16.9 Voltage regulation with parallel-switched transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26216.9.1 Regulation programs for transformers switched in parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26316.9.2 Functional principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26416.9.3 Influence of the circulating current regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26416.9.4 Activation of the regulation program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26516.9.5 Description of the regulation programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266

16.10 Nominal transformation of the measuring transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

16.11 Self-conduct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

16.12 LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28216.12.1 LCD contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28216.12.2 LCD saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28216.12.3 Background illumination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282

17 Definition of the Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

18 Symbols and their Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

19 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

20 Notes on the Interpreter Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

21 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

22 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Page 9: ba_reg_d_gb

9

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

1 Warnings and Information

The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is exclusively designed for implementation in systems and equipment incorporating electrical energy technology on which only trained experts are permitted to carry out all required work. Experts are persons who are familiar with the installation, mounting, commissioning and operation of these types of products. Furthermore, experts have qualifications which comply with their field of work.

The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring has been designed and tested in accordance with all important electrical safety regulations and left the factory in perfect condition. To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation, the following instructions and warnings in this operating manual must be observed.

❑ The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring has been designed to comply with IEC 10110/EN61010 (DIN VDE 0411), degree of protection I and was tested according to this standard before delivery.

❑ The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring must be earthed via a protective earth conductor. This condition is fulfilled when the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is connected to an auxiliary voltage with a protective earth conductor (European power supply system). If the auxiliary voltage power supply system does not have a protective earth conductor, an additional connection must be established from the protective earth conductor terminal to earth.

❑ The upper limit of the permissible auxiliary voltage UAUX may not be exceeded, neither permanently nor for a short period of time.

❑ Before changing the fuse, separate the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring completely from the auxiliary voltage UAUX.The use of fuses other than those of the indicated type and rated current is prohibited.

❑ A REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring which displays visible damage or clear malfunctioning must not be used and has to be secured against unintentionally being switched on.

Page 10: ba_reg_d_gb

10

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

❑ Maintenance and repair work on an opened REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring may only be carried out by authorised experts.

Warning signs

Please familiarise yourself with the nominal insulation voltage of the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring before connecting the device.

Ensure that the voltages are connected via a disconnecting mechanism, and that the current path can be short circuited if there is a device fault to enable problem-free device replacement.

This is only required if the device, including the device housing/mounting rack, has to be disassembled. If the plug-in modules alone are removed, the short circuit plug prevents the circuits from being used whilst open.

When wiring, please ensure that the conductors are either bound short or kept sufficiently short, so that they can neither come into contact with the connecting elements (plugs, terminals etc.) nor the stripped conductor ends of circuits with a low nominal insulation voltage. If this is not ensured, a self-feeding voltage may form when an error occur, turning the originally safe low voltage circuits (e.g. mA outputs) into ones that are dangerous if touched.

!

Page 11: ba_reg_d_gb

11

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

2 Scope of Delivery

1 REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring

1 short-form operating manual in English

1 operating manual in English

1 WinREG programming and parameterisation software

1 cable

1 replacement fuse

Page 12: ba_reg_d_gb

12

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

3 Technical Data

3.1 Plug-in modulesFront panel Plastic film on aluminium support

RAL 7035 light grey

Height 3 U (128.5 mm)

Width 28 T (142.2 mm)

Weight ≤ 1.5 kg

Degree of protectionPlug-in modules IP00Socket connector IP00

Configuration according to DIN 41494 Part 5

Plug-in connector DIN 41612

Dimensions

���

� � � � � � � � �

� � � �� � � � � � � ��

� �

� �

� �

� � � �

� � � � � �

� � � � � � �

28 MW

Page 13: ba_reg_d_gb

13

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Location of blade connectors

Location of socket connectors

����������

���������

��������

���������

����

�����

�����

�����

�����

�����

�����

�����

��������

��

1

2

3

4

5

6

Analogue module

optional

� � � �� � � �� � � �� � � � � � � �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

�� �� � �� ��� �

123456

Page 14: ba_reg_d_gb

14

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

3.2 Connection diagram

Contact load R1, R2: AC 250 V, 5 A, cosϕ = 1, DC 250 V, 150 W

REG-D

* Please observe the contact load at R1 and R2 (see below)!

** The connections for I and U can be freely assigned via the menu.

110 V DC 230 V AC20 A Switch on 5 A @ cosϕ = 1

5 A Hold 3 A @ cosϕ = 0.4

0.4 A Switch off

Page 15: ba_reg_d_gb

15

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

3.3 Overview of featuresREG-D is a highly variable product.

The operating manual must take this factor into account and provide different descriptions for the for the various specifications.

Because the features ... M2, S1... D2 ... are noted on the name plate of the device, but the relation to the function which it stands for is not always given, the complete structure of the device's features is listed here.

Feature Code

REG-D™ Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring, 28TE, 3HE plug-in moduleStandard version, with double E-LAN interface, COM 1, COM 2,16 binary inputs, 10 relay outputs plus status relays andWinREG parameterisation and programming soft-ware incl. connection cable

REG-D™

Design19” plug-in moduleWall-mounting housing (30TE) - without wiringWall-mounting housing (30TE) - with wiring(Terminals compatible with REG 5A)Panel-mounting housing (30TE) with wiringPanel-mounting housing (49TE) with wiringWall-mounting housing (49TE) with wiringWall-mounting or panel-mounting housing (30/49TE) on request19” mounting rack according on request

B01B02B03

B05B06B07B91B92

Power supplyFrom monitoring network AC 80V ... 110V ... 185V AC 85V ... 110V ... 264V / DC 88V ... 220V ... 280VDC 18V ... 60V ... 72V

H0H1H2

Input currentIEN 1AIEN 5A

F1F2

Page 16: ba_reg_d_gb

16

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Measurement transducer display functions for net-work quantitiesThree-phase current with equal loadThree-phase current with unequal loadU measurement for overvoltage, U and I measure-ments for undervoltageOther uses of the transformer ( 2 x I, 2 x U, e.g. triple-wound transformer)

M1M2M3

M9

Recorder functions for network quantitiesIncl. evaluation softwareWithoutWith

S0S1

Parallel operationwithout firmware for parallel operationwith firmware for parallel operation

K0K1

Feature Code

Page 17: ba_reg_d_gb

17

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Analogue inputs and outputswithoutwith 2 inputswith 4 inputswith 6 inputswith 2 outputswith 4 outputswith 6 outputswith 2 inputs and 2 outputswith 2 inputs and 4 outputswith 4 inputs and 2 outputsAny combination on requesteach with 2 analogue inputs and outputsPT 100 direct inputTap-change potentiometer input

Note:Please specify the scale if known!:Example:

Channel 1: -100 ... 0 ... +100 MW -20 ... 0 ... +20 mA

Channel 2:0 ... 80 ... 100 V4 ... 16 ... 20 mA

Channel 3:1 ... 19 Stufen0 ... 20 mA

Note:A total of 3 modules may be used. Pay attentionto the TMM particularly with use of thetransformer monitoring module!

E00E91E92E93E94E95E96E97E98E99E900

Binary inputs (freely programmable)E1...E8: AC/DC48..250V, E9...E16: AC/DC 10 ... 50V (can also be used as a BCD input)E1...E16: AC/DC 48 ...250V (can also be used as a BCD input)E1...E16: AC/DC 10 ...50V (can also be used as a BCD input)

D1

D2

D3

RS485 interface (COM 3)withoutwithNote:COM 3 is only required for ANA-D and BIN-D!

R0R1

Feature Code

Page 18: ba_reg_d_gb

18

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Control system connection: Internal or external:without (more in Feature Group “Y”))with integrated connection (more in Feature Group “XL”)with ext. connection (REG-P/PE/PM) more in Feature Group “Y”)

XW0XW1

XW9

Integrated protocol interface cardfor control connection of REG-D™ systemfor control connection of multiple systemsNote: XL9 can only be combined with XZ15..XZ19 and XZ91

XL1XL9

Type of connection:Copper RS 232RS 485 only for 2-wire operation

Note:XV13 .. XV 19 can only be selected in combination with B02…B92.In all other case, select the appropriate fibre optic cable module!

Fibre optic cable with FSMA connectionGlass fibre(wavelength 800...900 nm, range 2000 m)Plastic(wavelength 620...680 nm, range 50 m)

Fibre optic cable with ST connectionGlass fibre (wavelength 800...900 nm, range 2000 m)Plastic(wavelength 620...680 nm, range 50 m)

XV10XV11

XV13

XV15

XV17

XV19

Feature Code

Page 19: ba_reg_d_gb

19

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Log IEC60870-5-103 for ABBIEC60870-5-103 for ArevaIEC60870-5-103 for SATIEC60870-5-103 for Siemens (LSA/SAS)IEC60870-5-103 for Sprecher AutomationIEC60870-5-103 for andere

IEC60870-5-101 for ABBIEC60870-5-101 for IDSIEC60870-5-101 for SATIEC60870-5-101 for Siemens (LSA/SAS)IEC60870-5-101 for others

DNP 3.00

LONMark

SPABUSMODBUS RTU

XZ10XZ11XZ12XZ13XZ14XZ90

XZ15XZ17XZ18XZ19XZ91

XZ20

XZ21

XZ22XZ23

Local/remote switching using the keyboardwithoutwith

Y0Y1

Status outputcloses during faultopens during fault

U0U1

Operating manualGermanEnglishFrenchSpanishItalianRussian

G1G2G3G4G5G8

Display textSame as operating manualGermanEnglishFrenchSpanishItalianDutchCzechRussian

A0A1A2A3A4A5A6A7A8

Feature Code

Page 20: ba_reg_d_gb

20

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

3.4 Block diagram3.4.1 Block diagram of socket connectors

Feature ... D1 ...

�����

��

�����

��

��

��

� � � � � � � � � � � � �

� � � � � � � � � � � � �

� � ! " � � � � # � $ % % $ !

� � ! " � � � � # � $ % % $ !

� � ! " � � � � # � $ % % $ !

� � ! " � � � � # � $ % % $ !

� � ! " � � � � # � $ % % $ !

� � ! " � � � � # � $ % % $ !

� � ! " � � � � # � $ % % $ !

� � ! " � � � � # � $ % % $ !

� � ! " � � � � # � $ % % $ !

� � ! " � � � � # � $ % % $ !

� � ! " � � � � # � $ % % $ !

� � ! " � � � � # � $ % % $ !

� � ! " � � � � # � $ % % $ !

��

��

&�' ��(

)��!"

*+�����

+ �����

������������������ ,�

����

����-.

���)���

���)��)�

��

��

��

�������

� �!�� ��"

�����#

�$���

�$���

/

��)! �

0 , / .

0 , 1 .

�$��2*

)��

* ) � � % $ � � 3 � , * 2 � .

� $ � ) $ ! � , � .

1 � � � � � � � � � � � � � / � � � % *

1 � � � � � � � � � � � � � / � � � % *

1 � � � � � � � � � � � � � / � � � % *

1 � � � � � � � � � � � � � / � � � % *

1 � � � � � � � � � � � � � / � � � % *

1 � � � � � � � � � � � � � / � � � % *

0�' �

4$�(

��

��

��

1/

//

//

11

11

1

��)! ��

��)! ��

��

� �

��

��

��

��

��

��

%���&#���

������'

�(((��

)*�+��

��

/1

//

//

/1

11

11

/1

/1

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

*((�#�% �����&

������

5�36 ��3

��� 3�����

��

4�'

��� �

�� �

*((�#�% �����&

������

5�36 ��3

��� 3�����

��

4�'

45���

����

,�����

��& .

�����

45���

,�����

��4 .

���)

45���

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

� * /

� * 1

� /

� 1

� * /

� * 1

� /

� 1

7 - /

7 - 1

4 - /

4 - 1

��

7 - �

4 - �

� � �

4 7 5

+ 7 5

� � 8 � � ) (

��

�15)��!)#�3��� 3���

����9

�:��

����

$� !

��6 !

� ��

� � � � �

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�� �

& � !

� + � 3 � � � $ 3 � 2 � � � 3 � � � $ 3 �

��

� � � � � �;*�

;*�

;*�

;*

< *���

* ( ( � # � % � � � � � & � � � � � �

5 � 3 6 � � 3 � � � 3 � � � � � � �

4 � '

% � � � & # � � � � � � � � � � � , * � +% � � � & # � � � � � � �' � $ � � , * � +, � � � � � � � � � .

��

=�

� � �

4 �

� 7 4

+ 7 5

7 > �

4 7 5

4 > �

� 5 4

� + �

��

�)

�'

�,

�-

�.

���

��

/�#0��&1

"�2

�&

�� /

�3

/�*

/�

/1

��

/�)

�� �

/�'

�� �

/�,

�� �

/1

�-

��

��6 !

?

0

��

0�

0�

* ( ( � # � % � � � � � & � � � � � �

5 � 3 6 � � 3 � � � 3 � � � � � � �

��

��

��

�)

�'

�,

�-

���

� � ! " � � � � # � $ % % $ !

�����

��

%���&#���

������

*�(((�'

�+��

��

Page 21: ba_reg_d_gb

21

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Feature ... D2 ...

������

��

&�' ��()��!"

*+�����+

�����

������������������,���������-.

���)������)��)�

��

��

��

�����

��

� �!�� �

�"

�����#

�$���

�$���

/

��)! �

0,/.

0,1.

�$��2*)��

*)��%$��3�,*2�.

�$�)$!�,�.

1�������������/���%*

1�������������/���%*

1�������������/���%*

1�������������/���%*

1�������������/���%*

1�������������/���%*

0�' �

4$�(

��

��

��

1/

//

//

11

11

1

��)! ��

��)! ��

��

� �

��

��

��

��

��

��

%���&#���������' �(((��)*�+��

��

/1

//

//

/1

11

11

/1

/1

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

*((�#�% �����&������

5�36 ��3��� 3�������

4�'

���

���

��

*((�#�% �����&������

5�36 ��3��� 3�������

4�'

45���

����

,�������& .

�����

45���

,�������4 .

���)

45���

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

�*/

�*1

�/

�1

�*/

�*1

�/

�1

7-/

7-1

4-/

4-1

��

7-�

4-�

���

475

+75

��8��)(

��

�15)��!)#�3��� 3���

����9 �:������$� !

� �

�� �

� ��� �

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

��

���

&�!

�+�3���$3�2���3���$3�

��

������;*�

;*�

;*�

;*

<*� � �

*((�#�% �����&������

5�36 ��3��� 3�������

4�'

%���&#�����������,*�+%���&#�������

,*�+,�������� .

��

=�

���

4�

�74

+75

7>�

475

4>�

�54

�+�

��

�)

�'

�,

�-

�.

���

��

/�#0��&1

"�2

�&

���

��

���

��

���

��

� �

? 0

��

0�

0�

*((�#�% �����&������

5�36 ��3��� 3�������

��

��

��

�)

�'

�,

�-

���

�� !"����#�$%%$!

������

��

/1

�3

/1

�*

/1

/1

��

/1

�)

/1

�'

/1

�,

/1

�-

6! 6!

�������

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

��

��

Page 22: ba_reg_d_gb

22

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

3.4.2 Socket connector 1

Socket connector 1,(Binary outputs BOR1 ... R6BA1 ... BA4)

3.4.2.1 Socket connector 1; (binary outputs BO

Note)Option N2 is connected to the local-remote switch via the keypad (feature Y1) by default.

R1 ... R6, BA1 ... BA4: potential free relay contactsLoad: 250 V AC, 5 A, cosϕ = 1,

250 V DC, 150 W

NoteThe “Status” binary output can be used as either an “NC contact” or an “NO contact” through the appropriate configuration of a wire jumper. The location of the wire jumper is shown in the diagram on page 23.

Function Des Assignment Pin Assignment PinRaise (2 contact pairs)1 NC contact and1 NO contact

R1 Pole b2 NC contact z2Pole b4 NO contact z4

Lower (2 contact pairs)1 NC contact and1 NO contact

R2 Pole b8 NC contact z8Pole b10 NO contact z10

Freely programmable R3 Pole b14 NO contact z14Freely programmable R4 Pole b16 NO contact z16Freely programmable R5 Pole b20 NO contact z20Manual/Automatic(switch)

R6 Pole b22 NO contact z22NC contact b24

Status Status Pole b26 NO contact z24Freely programmableBinary outputs (BO)4 relays

BA1 ... BA4

Poles BA1...4

z28

NC contact BA1

b30 NC contact BA3

z30

NC contact BA2

b32 NC contact BA4

z32

* ( ( � # � % � � � & � � � � � �

5 � 3 6 � � 3 � � � 3 � � � � � � �

4 � '

� �

� �

&�!

�+�3���$3�2

���3���$3�

�$��2*)��

0�' �

4$�(

� ��

� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �

� � � � � �

;*�

;*�

;*�

;*

� *

��

��

��

% � � � & # � � � � � � � � � � � ) * � +

� � � ) � ' � , � -�

��

� � � � �% � � � & # � � � � � � �' � $ � � ) * � +, � � � � � � � � � .

Page 23: ba_reg_d_gb

23

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Location of the wire jumper on terminal block 1

Caution!Only use one function at a time! Either “NC contact” or “NO contact”

To interlock a control command, the relays R1 and R2 may be switched as follows:

REG-REL

“NO contact (NO)” function “NC contact (NC)” function

R1

Raise

R2

Lower

Page 24: ba_reg_d_gb

24

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

3.4.3 Socket connector 2

Socket connector 2(binary inputsE1 ... E16

3.4.3.1 Socket connector 2; (binary inputs, feature D1)

NoteE9 ... E16 are always factory-paramaterised as a BCD input, when not working with feature T1. If, however, it will be used with feature T1, the BCD-input can be achieved by using terminal block 5 (or socket connector 5).

Function Des Assignment Pin Assignment PinFreely configurable(raise)

E1 + b2 - z2

Freely configurable (lower)

E2 + b4 - z4

Freely configurable(Inhibit Low)

E3 + b6 - z6

Freely configurable(high-speed switching)

E4 + b8 - z8

Manual / Automatic(M/A)

E5 + b10 - z10

Manual (M) E6 + b12 - z12

Freely configurable E7 + b14 - z14

Freely configurable E8 + b16 - z16

Freely configurable (BCD1)

E 9 + b24 - b32

Freely configurable (BCD2)

E 10 + b26 - b32

Freely configurable (BCD4)

E 11 + b28 - b32

Freely configurable (BCD8)

E 12 + b30 - b32

Freely configurable (BCD10)

E 13 + z24 - z32

Freely configurable (BCD20)

E 14 + z26 - z32

Freely configurable E 15 + z28 - z32

Negative sign for BCD-Code

E 16 + z30 - z32

Page 25: ba_reg_d_gb

25

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

NoteThe Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can be influenced by external signals via inputs E1 ... E16.Only inputs 5 and 6 are permanently assigned. All other inputs are freely configurable The factory settings are shown in brackets (refer to table on page 24)!

� � � � � � �

� � � �

�������� ���

��

� ������� ���

��

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

*)��%$��3�,*2�

.

�$�)$!�,�

.

% � � � & # � � � � � � � � � ' � ( ( ( � � ) * � + � � � � �

/ 1 / / / / /1 1 1 1 1 / 1 / 1

� � � � � �

� � �

� � � � � �

� � �

� � � �

� �

� � � � � � � �

� �

� �

� � � � ) � ' � , � - � . �

� �

/� 3

/� *

/�

/ 1� �

/� )

� �

/� '

� �

/� ,

� �

/ 1� -

�� !"����#�$%%$!

% � � � & # � � � � � � � � � * � ( ( ( � ' � + � � � � �

Page 26: ba_reg_d_gb

26

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Socket connector 2(binary inputsE1 ... E16

3.4.3.2 Socket connector 2; (binary inputs, feature D2)

NoteE9 ... E16 are always factory-paramaterised as BCD inputs, when not working with feature T1. However, if feature T1 is used, the BCD-input can be configured by using terminal block 5 (or socket connector 5).

Function Des Assignment Pin Assignment Pin

Freely configurable (Raise)

E1 + b2 - z2

Freely configurable (Lower)

E2 + b4 - z4

Freely configurable(Inhibit Low)

E3 + b6 - z6

Freely configurable(high-speed switching)

E4 + b8 - z8

Manual/Automatic(M/A)

E5 + b10 - z10

Manual (M) E6 + b12 - z12

Freely configurable E7 + b14 - z14

Freely configurable E8 + b16 - z16

Freely configurable (BCD1)

E 9 + b18 - z18

Freely configurable (BCD2)

E 10 + b20 - z20

Freely configurable (BCD4)

E 11 + b22 - z22

Freely configurable (BCD8)

E 12 + b24 - z24

Freely configurable (BCD10)

E 13 + b26 - z26

Freely configurable (BCD20)

E 14 + b28 - z28

Freely configurable E 15 + b30 - z30

Negative sign for BCD-Code

E 16 + b32 - z32

Page 27: ba_reg_d_gb

27

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

NoteThe Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can be influenced by external signals via inputs E1 ... E16.Only inputs 5 and 6 are permanently assigned. All other inputs are freely configurable. The factory settings are shown in brackets (refer to table on page 26)!

*)��%$��3�,*2�

.

�$�)$!�,�

.

% � � � & # � � � � � � � � � ' � ( ( ( � � ) * � + � � � � �

/ 1 / / / / /1 1 1 1 1 / 1 / 1

� � � � � �

� � �

� � � � � �

� � �

� � � � �

� � �

� � � � � � � � � � � �

� � �

� �

� �

� �

� � � � ) � ' � , � - � . �

� �

� �

� �

� �

� �

�� !"����#�$%%$!

/ 1� 3

/ 1� *

/ 1�

/ 1� �

/ 1� )

/ 1� '

/ 1� ,

/ 1� -

� � � � � � � �

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#� $%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

�� !"����#�$%%$!

Page 28: ba_reg_d_gb

28

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Socket connector 3(measuring voltage UE,auxiliary voltage UH)

3.4.4 Socket connector 3; (Measuring voltage, auxiliary voltage)

NoteIn the standard version, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is supplied with only one voltage transformer (U1). A second voltage transformer (U2) can optionally be supplied that can operate either together with U1 in a V-circuit or when electronically isolated from U1. If operating only with U1, the measuring voltage (command variable) must always be connected to pins 20 and 22.The two voltage transformers U1 and U2 can also be used to regulate the triple-wound transformers. However, in all cases additional consultation is necessary.

Function Assign-ment

Pin

Measuring voltage UE L1 20

L2 22

L3 24

Auxiliary voltage (AC/DC) UH) L (+) 28

N (-) 30

Earth 32

& � ' � � ( ) � � ! "

* + � � � � � +

0,/.

0,1.

� � � � � �

* ( ( � # � % � � � & � � � � � �

5 � 3 6 � � 3 � � � 3 � � � � � � �

4 � '

� � � � � � � � �

? 0

0�

0�

� � � �

� �

? �?

Page 29: ba_reg_d_gb

29

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Socket connector 4(input formeasuring current IE)

3.4.5 Socket connector 4; (measuring current input)

NoteCurrent IE2 is only used for special applications and measurements in three-phase current networks (Aron circuit) loaded according to the requirements of the user (feature M2).

Command variable (voltage)

L1 L2 L3

Pin connection

L1 − L2 20 22 −−−

L2 − L3 −−− 20 22

L1 − L2 22 −−− 20

Function Assignment Pin

Measuring current (AC) IE1 k 6

l 5

Measuring current (AC) IE2 k 4

l 3

Page 30: ba_reg_d_gb

30

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Socket connector 5(tap-changer)BCD signal display

3.4.6 Socket connector 5; (tap changing via feature T1)

for control voltages USt = AC/DC 48 V ... 250 V

Input Function Assignment Pin Assignment Pin

E17 1 (BCD) + b2 - z2

E18 2 (BCD) + b4 - z4

E19 4 (BCD) + b6 - z6

E20 8 (BCD) + b8 - z8

E21 10 (BCD) + b10 - z10

E22 20 (BCD) + b12 - z12

E23 Freelyprogrammable

+ b14 - z14

E24 Positive or negative sign of the display: Minus

+ b16 - z16

E25 Freelyprogrammable

+ b24 - b32

E26 Freelyprogrammable

+ b26 - b32

E27 Freelyprogrammable

+ b28 - b32

E28 Freelyprogrammable

+ b30 - b32

E29 Freelyprogrammable

+ z24 - z32

E30 Freelyprogrammable

+ z26 - z32

E31 Freelyprogrammable

+ z28 - z32

E32 Freelyprogrammable

+ z30 - z32

Page 31: ba_reg_d_gb

31

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

NoteFor parameterisation at a later date or for alterations, ensure that inputs b24 ... z32 (48 V ... 230 V) are designated asE17 ... E24 and inputs b2 ... z16 (10 V ... 48 V) asE25 ... E32. If feature T1 is included in the scope of delivery, the inputs are normally prepared for switching with BCD signals (refer to tables). The inputs can be used for a variety of other functions using setup 5 of the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring.

If the BCD signal is only in the range 10 V ... 48 V, inputs E25 ... E30 must also be configured as BCD inputs using setup 5 or

WinREG.

e.g.: E25 BCD1E26 BCD2E27 BCD4E28 BCD8E29 BCD10E30 BCD20

� � �

� � � � � � � � � � � � �

�� � � � � � �

/ 1 / 1 / 1 / 1 / 1 / 1 / 1 / 1

� � � � � � � @ / � @ 1

' � ( ( ( � � ) * � + � � & � * � ( ( ( � , * � +

� � ? � A � � � � � � � � � � � � � �

� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �

�� �� �� ��

� � ? � A � � � � � � � � � � � �

* ( ( � # � % � � � & � � � � � �

5 � 3 6 � � 3 � � � 3 � � � � � � �

4 � '

* ( ( � # � % � � � & � � � � � �

4 � '

% � � " � � $ � � � � � � & � � � � � � � � �, � � � � � � 7 .

Page 32: ba_reg_d_gb

32

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Socket connector 5(tap-changer)BCD signal display

BCD coding

Socket connector 5(tap-changer)BCD signal display

For control voltages USt = AC/DC 10 V ... 48 V

BCD input signal Relay display

− + 20 10 8 4 2 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 4

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 5

0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 6

0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 7

0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 8

0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 9

0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 10

0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 11

0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 12

0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 13

0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 14

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 20

0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 21

1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 −21

Input BCD Pin Input BCD Pin

E25 1 b24 E29 10 z24

E26 2 b26 E30 20 z26

E27 4 b28 E31 Vz+ z28

E28 8 b30 E32 Vz - z30

GND 1 ... 8 b32 GND 10 ... VZ - z32

Page 33: ba_reg_d_gb

33

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Socket connector 6(Analogue inputs AI... and/oranalogue outputsAO ... .Programmableassignment,interfaces)

3.4.7 Socket connector 6; (analogue inputs / outputs;interfaces)

Function Assignment Pin Assignment Pin

Analogue modules 1.1and 1.2

1.1 + b2 1.2 + z2

1.1 - b4 1.2 - z4

E-LAN left EA + b6 right EA + z6

left EA - b8 right EA - z8

left E + b10 right E + z10

left E - b12 right E - z12

Analogue modules 2.1and 2.2

2.1 + b14 2.2 + z14

2.1 - b16 2.2 - z16

COM 2 TxD b20 RTS z20

RxD b22 CTS z22

GND b24 don’t use z24

Analogue modules 3.1and 3.2

3.1 + b26 3.2 + z26

3.1 - b28 3.2 - z28

COM 3 Tx + b30 Rx + z30

Tx - b32 Rx - z32

/

1�������������/���%

*

1�������������/���%

*

1�������������/���%

*

1�������������/���%

*

1�������������/���%

*

1 �������������/���%

*

1 / / / / /1 1 1 1 1

� � � � �

� �

� � � � � � � � � �

� � � �

�5 � 3 6 � � 3 � � � 3 � � � � � � �

4 � '

� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � , � � � � � � � � � - .

� � � ) � � � � � � ) � � ) �

% � ) ! � % � ) ! � � % � ) ! � �

* ( ( � # � % � � � & � � � � � �

� $ � � �

� $ � � �

, � � � � � � � & .

� � � � �

4 5 � � �

� , � � � � � � ! � 4 .

� � � )

4 5 � � �

�� � �� �� �� �� �� �� � � � � �� �� �

����

�� � �

�*/

�*1

�/

�1

�*/

�*1

�/

�1

7-/

7-1

4-/

4-1

��

7-�

4-�

���

475

+75

/ ��

���

�5 � 3 6 � � 3 � � � 3 � � � � � � �

4 � '

* ( ( � # � % � � � & � � � � � �

Page 34: ba_reg_d_gb

34

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

NoteThe analogue inputs and outputs can be adjusted to the appropriate measuring tasks via SETUP 6, F1, F5 on the keypad, or − far more elegantly − by using WinREG. In principle, all the analogue measurement quantities (U, I, P, Q, S, ...) that the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can measure can be output as mA values. This means the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can be used as a cost-effective transducer without requiring additional space.In some cases an adjustment using additional background programs may be required. In this case we recommend contacting our headquarters.Quasi-analogue signals, e.g. tap-changing, can also be output as analogue values if required.To upgrade the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring at a later point, the input and output modules must be connected to the REG-CPU terminal block with two channels each (see “Updating Analogue Inputs, Outputs, Tap-Change Potentiometer Input” on page 215).

Page 35: ba_reg_d_gb

35

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Interface COM 13.4.8 Interface COM 1

Function Pin

DCD 1

RXD 2

TXD 3

DTR 4

Signal-Ground 5

DSR 6

RTS 7

CTS 8

RI 9

4 5 � � �

� � � �

� � � �

= � �

���

4�

�74

+75

7>�

475

4>�

�54

�+�

� 1 5 ) � � ! ) # � 3 � � � 3 � � �� � � � 9 � : � � � � � � $ � !

Page 36: ba_reg_d_gb

36

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

3.5 Installation in the mounting rack

3.5.1 19” mounting rack, feature B92The diagrams show the main components of a REGSys™ regulation system in a 19” mounting rack.The number and location of the individual connection blocks depends on the respective system version.The specified dimensions must never be exceeded. Each mounting rack is prepared for connecting up to 2 LWL connections (FSMA or ST), that will be mounted if ordered.

Caution!The mounting rack must be earthed!Earth it using an earthing clamp (green/yellow) and/or an earth strap.

The mounting rack has 84 sections and therefore 84 “n” place numbers. A specific place number is the reference point for the installation of the guide and the connection element on the rear side of the mounting rack.

Place numbers

Socket connector 1 2 3 4 5 6

Screws n n+4 n+8 n+11 n+16 n+25

Guide n - - - - n+26

�==

�����

�=���

� � �

� � � � �

�=��

,�7�.

=��

� � �

� � � - � � B � � � C � � � � � = �

����

Page 37: ba_reg_d_gb

37

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

3.6 Wall-mounted housing

3.6.1 Wall-mounted housing, type 30 MW, feature B02

3.6.2 Wall-mounted housing, type 30 MW, feature B03

� � � �� � � � � � � ��

� �

� �

� �

� � � �

� � � � � �

� � � � � � �

� 4 � � � $ � 4 ) ' 4 * *

� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �

� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � !� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � "# � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � "$ � � � � � � � � � � % � � � � � � � � � � � � � � & � � !

� � ' � ( � � � � � � ( � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � &

� � � ! � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � ) � � !

���

��

� � �

� �

� ) ' , - . 3 *

) ' ) , ) - ) . ) ) 3 ' * ' ' �) )) �) ) *� 3� � .

� 5 � $ � � � � )

? � < � ! : ( ( � # � ? � � D ( � # � 5 � $ � ) (

*2�*

9 E 9 �

4 � 0

� � : �

4 � 0 �

: � �

4 � 0 �

; *

4 � 0 2 4

; * �

4 � 0 � 2 4

; * �

4 � 0 � 2 4

� � � �� � � � � � � ��

� �

� �

� �

� � � �

� � � � � �

� � � � � � �

� 4 � � � $ � 4 ) ' 4 * *

� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �

� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � !� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � "# � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � "$ � � � � � � � � � � % � � � � � � � � � � � � � � & � � !

� � ' � ( � � � � � � ( � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � &

� � � ! � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � ) � � !

� ) ' , - . 3 *

� . � � 3 ) * ) ) � ) ) ) ' ) , ) - ) . ) ) 3 ' * ' ' �

� �

���

��

� � �

Page 38: ba_reg_d_gb

38

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

3.6.3 Control panel mounting enclosure, type 30 MW, feature B05

3.6.4 Control panel mounting enclosure, type 49 MW, feature B06

NoteThe enclosure can accommodate further REGSys™ components (REG-P, BIN-D, etc.)

� � � �� � � � � � � ��

� �

� �

� �

� � � �

� � � � � �

� � � � � � �

� 4 � � � $ � 4 ) ' 4 * *

� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �

� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � !� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � "# � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � "$ � � � � � � � � � � % � � � � � � � � � � � � � � & � � !

� � ' � ( � � � � � � ( � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � &

� � � ! � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � ) � � !

� � =� �

� �

��

) '

) ,

) -

) .

)

) 3

' *

'

' �

) )

) �

)

) *

� 3

� .

, *

,

, �

, )

, '

, ,

, -

, .

,

' 3

'

' .

' -

' ,

' '

' )

)

'

,

-

.

3

*

* 2 � *

6

7 8 � � � � �

,

'

)

3

� *

.

-

� �

� )

� '

� ,

� -

< $ �

* ) � �

, * 2 < .

5 3 9 � ! ! 1

5 � � ! ! 1

� ( ( ( � �

� � � # � �

, 1 .

5 � $ � ) (

� � � # � �

� � � # � �

� * /

� * 1

� /

� 1

�10*��,0.

; + � �

, 1 .

5 � $ � ) (

� �

� +

7 � �

( 3 9 $ ! � ) � #

( � � ) � #

� � � # � �

� � � # � �

; + � � �

; + � � �

; + � � �

; + � � �

; + � � � �

� @

9 � �

9 E 9 �

� � : �

< $ � 2 * ) � �

<

*

� � � � � � � � Terminal designation I ... IV

� � � � % � � � � � � � % * � � � � % � � � � � � � % *

� � � �� � � � � � � ��

� �

� �

� �

� � � �

� � � � � �

� � � � � � �

� 4 � � � $ � 4 ) ' 4 * *

� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �

� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � !� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � "# � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � "$ � � � � � � � � � � % � � � � � � � � � � � � � � & � � !

� � ' � ( � � � � � � ( � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � &

� � � ! � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � ) � � !

� � � � =

��

� � �

) '

) ,

) -

) .

)

) 3

' *

'

' �

) )

) �

)

) *

� 3

� .

, *

,

, �

, )

, '

, ,

, -

, .

,

' 3

'

' .

' -

' ,

' '

' )

)

'

,

-

.

3

*

* 2 � *

6

7 8 � � � � �

,

'

)

3

� *

.

-

� �

� )

� '

� ,

� -

< $ �

* ) � �

, * 2 < .

5 3 9 � ! ! 1

5 � � ! ! 1

� ( ( ( � �

� � � # � �

, 1 .

5 � $ � ) (

� � � # � �

� � � # � �

� * /

� * 1

� /

� 1

�10*��,0.

; + � �

, 1 .

5 � $ � ) (

� �

� +

7 � �

( 3 9 $ ! � ) � #

( � � ) � #

� � � # � �

� � � # � �

; + � � �

; + � � �

; + � � �

; + � � �

; + � � � �

� @

9 � �

9 E 9 �

� � : �

< $ � 2 * ) � �

<

*

� � � � � � � � Terminal designation I ... IV

Page 39: ba_reg_d_gb

39

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

3.6.5 Wall-mounted housing, type 49 MW, feature B07

NoteThe housing can accommodate further REGSys™ components (REG-P, BIN-D, etc.).The housing feature B07 will then, however, become feature B91.

9E9 �

� 4 � 0 � 4 � 0 � 4 � 0 �

5��!!1

( ��)�#

1

�� : �

539� !!1

(39$!�#�

*)��%�

,*2<.

<$�

:� �

:� �

� � � � � � � � � � � = � �

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

<$�2*)��

< * :� �

:� �

;�

;��

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

���

;��

;��

;��

;��

;�=

;��

�*/

�*1

�/

�1

� 1 0 * �4 � 0 � 2 4

;*�

� ) ' , - . 3 *

) ' ) , ) - ) . ) ) 3 ' * ' ' �) )) �) ) *� 3� � .

� 5 � $ � � � � )

? � < � ! : ( ( � # � ? � � D ( � # � 5 � $ � ) (

*2�*

9 E 9 �

4 � 0

� � : �

4 � 0 �

: � �

4 � 0 �

; *

4 � 0 2 4

; * �

4 � 0 � 2 4

; * �

4 � 0 � 2 4

, ' ) � 3 � * . - � � � � ) � ' � , � -

' ,' '' ) , * , , � , ) , '' 3' ' .' - , , , - , . ,

� � � � % � � � � � � � % * � � � � % � � � � � � � % *

� � � �� � � � � � � ��

� �

� �

� �

� � � �

� � � � � �

� � � � � � �

� 4 � � � $ � 4 ) ' 4 * *

� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � �

� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � !� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � "# � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � "$ � � � � � � � � � � % � � � � � � � � � � � � � � & � � !

� � ' � ( � � � � � � ( � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � &

� � � ! � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � ) � � !

� � �

��

���

� ) ' , - . 3 *

� . � � 3 ) * ) ) � ) ) ) ' ) , ) - ) . ) ) 3 ' * ' ' � ' ) ' ' ' , ' - ' . ' ' 3 , * , , � , ) , ' , , , - , . ,

� ) ' , - . 3 � * � � � � ) � ' � , � -

� �

� � �

� � � � �

Page 40: ba_reg_d_gb

40

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

3.7 Pin assignment for types B05, B06 and B07(Standard assignment, if no other agreements have been reached!)

Scr

ew c

onne

ctor

term

inal

I

No.

1 Auxiliary voltageUH AC/DC

2 Auxiliary voltage

3

4 Input voltageUE

5 Input voltage

6

7 kCurrent input

8 I

9Status

❏ open during fault

10 ❏ closed during fault

Scr

ew c

onne

ctor

term

inal

II

No.

11 Input 1 Raise

12 Input 2 Lower

13 Input 3 Inhibit low

14 Input 4 High-speed switching

15 Input 5 AUTO (M/A)

16 Input 6 MANUAL

17 Input 7 Freely programmable

18 Input 8 Freely programmable

19 Ground for input terminals 11 ... 18

20

21

22

23 EA+

E-LAN (L)24 EA -

25 E+

26 E-

Page 41: ba_reg_d_gb

41

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Scr

ew c

onne

ctor

term

inal

III

No.

27

Raise ↑28

29

30

31

Lower ↓32

33

34

35Freely programmable

36

37Freely programmable

38

39Freely programmable

40

41

42

Page 42: ba_reg_d_gb

42

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Scr

ew c

onne

ctor

term

inal

IV

No.

43

Input tap-changer50 ... 230 V AC/DC

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57 MANUAL

58 AUTO

BCD 1

BCD 2

BCD 4

BCD 8

BCD 10

BCD 20

VZ

(-)

Page 43: ba_reg_d_gb

43

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

4 Operation

4.1 The front panel operator interface of the REG-D

The MPK operation level (people-process-communication; German: Mensch-Prozeß-Kommunikation) of the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is implemented as a membrane keypad with integrated light-emitting diodes (LEDs).

� � � �� � � � � � � ��

� �

� �

� �

� � � �

� � � � � �

� � � � � � �

Function keys

LEDsLCD display

Automatic operationManual (M)

AbortMenu

ReturnArrow keys

COM 1 interface

LabelInformation:With an appropriatetool, the insertedlabel can be removedfor labelling.

LocalRemote

5671234

Status

Page 44: ba_reg_d_gb

44

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

4.1.1 Display elements

LCD display regulator mode

LCD Display Recorder Mode

Address at bus (station identification) Relay name Time

Setpoint value

Setpoint value

Regulative deviation

Backwards high-speed switching is indicated by “<--<”

“ACTUAL VALUE” in

“ACTUAL VALUE” inActual value

when the regulative deviation is lower than the permissible regulative deviation.when the regulative deviation is higher than the permissible regulative deviation.

Identification lineStatus line

Progress bar (when active)

small letters = measurementsimulation off

capital letters = measurementsimulation is running in %

in V/kV

in V/kV

Address at bus (station identification) Relay name Time

Forward

Date

Present voltage

Feedrate

Identification line

Set permissibleregulative deviation

TimePresent voltage Tap-change

speed

Stretch scale

Back

Menu recorder

Present feedrate speed(14s / scale section)

Present voltage

Page 45: ba_reg_d_gb

45

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

LEDs

All LEDs (excluding status LED) are freely programmable. The LEDs 5 ... 7 are assigned the functions >U, <U and >I as standard.

4.1.2 Function keys

Function keys (F1 ... F5)Choose the various display modes and parameterise the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring.

AUTOMATIC operation modeAutomatic regulation with specified parameters

MANUAL operation modeParameterise the REG-D and manually control the transformer.

NoteChanges to the parameters are only accepted when in “MANUAL OPERATION MODE” .

Local / RemoteSwitch between local and remote.Use the local/remote key to change between local and remote modes. The selected condition is indicated by an LED (red = local, green = remote).

“Local” functionSwitching between MANUAL / AUTOMATIC modes and between raise / lower control modes is only possible via the keypad

( ).

“Remote” functionSwitching between MANUAL / AUTOMATIC modes and between raise / lower control commands is only possible via the binary inputs or via COM1/2.

The local / remote function is possible from Firmware version ≥1.97.

Status green

> U Voltage limit U exceeded red

< U Voltage limit U not reached red

> I Current limit I exceeded red

��

����

� � � �

� � � � � �

Page 46: ba_reg_d_gb

46

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

ESC (Abort)Return back to the display mode from the “SETUP” menus.

NoteChanges to parameters only become effective after confirming with “RETURN” .

Measurement value simulationRaise or lower the simulated measurement value with the arrow keys during the internal measuring value simulation (see page 143).

NoteThe measured values are supplied by the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring. It is not necessary to supply the measured values from an external source.

Controlling the tap-changer

The “raise” (higher voltage) and “lower” (reduce voltage) arrow keys are used to control the tap-changer, i.e. to make changes to the transformer mounting ratio (see page 146).

NoteThe arrow keys are only active when the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is in “MANUAL OPERATION MODE” .

MENUSwitch between the various display modes and the “SETUP” menus of the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring.

NoteChanges to the parameters are only accepted when in “MANUAL OPERATION MODE” .

ReturnConfirm/accept an altered parameter from the “SETUP” menu items (see page 102).

����

Page 47: ba_reg_d_gb

47

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

4.1.3 Plug connection

COM1 serial interfaceFor connecting the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring to external devices.

4.2 Operating principleThe operation of the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is completely menu-guided and is principally the same for each menu item in the “SETUP” menu.

The following operating principles apply for setting or changing the regulation parameters:

➪ “MANUAL OPERATION MODE” changes the operation mode to manual operation

➪ “MENU” Access list of operating modes

➪ “MENU” selects the menu item “SETUP”

➪ “MENU” can be used to scroll through the pages of the “SETUP” menu selection until the required parameter appears on the display.

➪ Select a parameter via the corresponding function key(“F1” to “F5”).

➪ Set the value of the parameter via the function keys.“F1” increases the value in large steps

“F2” increases the value in small steps

“F4” increases the value in small steps

“F5” decreases the value in large steps

➪ In some of the “SETUP” menus “F3” has a special function.

➪ After entering a value, the changed value must be confirmed by pressing the “RETURN” key.

➪ Enter password (see “Password request” on page 91).

➪ Return or leave the “SETUP” menus using “ESC (ABORT)”

���

����

����

����

��

��

��

��

Page 48: ba_reg_d_gb

48

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

➪ The “SETUP” menus will be automatically exited if no key is pressed for approx. 15 seconds.

➪ Once the desired parameters have been entered, checked, and confirmed with “RETURN” , the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can be switched back into automatic operation mode using “AUTOMATIC OPERATION MODE” .

4.3 Selecting the display mode

After pressing the “MENU” key, the display modes of the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can be selected.

The following modes are available:

❑ Regulator mode

❑ Transducer mode

❑ Recorder mode

❑ Statistics mode

❑ ParaGramer mode

Regulator mode ➪ The “F1” key is used to select the “Regulator Mode”.

The display indicates the set setpoint value in V (kV) and as a percentage of the nominal voltage, the momentary actual value, the value of the permissible regulative deviation and the current tap-changer position of the tap-changing transformer.

In addition the current deviation of the setpoint is indicated (by a pointer) on a

scale with a bandwidth of ± 10%.

➪ The colour of the scale’s pointer will change from transparent to solid black if the set permissible regulative deviation (tolerance band) is overshot or undershot.

If required, the present value of the current may also be displayed.

����

����

��

Page 49: ba_reg_d_gb

49

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

NoteIf the term “Actual Value” is displayed in capital letters as “ACTUAL VALUE”, then the “MEASUREMENT VALUE SIMULATION” is active!(see page 143).

Transducer mode

➪ The “F2” key is used to select the “Transducer Mode”.

When the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring carries out measurements in the Aron circuit (feature M2), a second transducer screen can be selected to display the measured values of the three-phase current networks loaded according to the requirements of the user.

The second transducer screen can be selected by pressing

either the or key.

Page 50: ba_reg_d_gb

50

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

The third transducer screen may be selected by pressing either

the or key.

In the transducer mode, only the reactive current I sinϕ of each transformer will be displayed. However, it is not possible to determine on the basis of this display which share of the current pertains to the load and which pertains to the reactive current.

Therefore, for parallel switching it is useful to display the reactive current.

The circulating active current Icirc indicates the share of the current that is “circulating” in the parallel-switched transformers, not the share taken up by the load.

The quasi-analogue scale illustrates the relationship between the circulating reactive current “Icirc” and the permissible circulating reactive current “perm. Icirc”.

If the circulating current becomes zero, the quotient will also become zero and the pointer will be positioned in the middle of the scale.

However, generally speaking, this ideal situation can in practice only then be reached when the parallel-switched transformers exhibit the same electrical features.

Page 51: ba_reg_d_gb

51

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Recorder mode➪ The “F3” key is used to select the “Recorder Mode”.

As standard, every Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is equipped with a DEMO recorder (feature: DEMO in the lower left corner of the grid).

Above the grid, the set permissible regulative deviation is displayed by means of two black arrows. In this manner, the recorder display is capable of supplying all of the information needed for operating the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring (see “LCD Display Recorder Mode” on page 44).

In addition to the value of the actual voltage and the tap-changer position (in the lower left-hand corner), the display also indicates the permissible regulative deviation (black arrows above the grid) and the change of the voltage over a period of time (past values).

Within the grid, the actual voltage is the value which intersects the lower line of the two parallel border lines at the top of the grid.

Independent of the selected feedrate speed (F4), the memory stores values at a constant rate of 1 second.

Each 1 second value is composed of 10 100ms values.

Seven scale divisions are available in total on the display. Thus, a maximum time range of 7 x 10 minutes (70 minutes) may be shown on the screen.

The shortest time range with the biggest optical resolution is 7 x 14 seconds (98 seconds).

Apart from the voltage, the recorder can also record the current and the angle ϕ. The tap-changer position and the setpoint value with tolerance band are always recorded as well.

In the second recorder menu (F3-F3), the desired mode can be selected via the menu item “Number of channels” (F4). It is possible to change modes at any time without loss of data.

Displaying the recorder dataIn the first recorder menu (F3), the menu item “Dual Display” (F4) can be used to switch the recorder display between the one-

��

Presentvalue

Page 52: ba_reg_d_gb

52

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

channel display of U and the two-channel display of U (left) and I (right). The time axis is the same for both curves; dx only changes the resolution of U, whereas the scale for I remains the same.

Derived variables from the recorder dataIn the first recorder menu (F3,F3), the menu item “MMU display” (F5) can be used to switch the display of variables derived from the cursor value (at the very top) on and off.If only two recorder channels (U+I) have been selected (second recorder menu (F3,F3,F4)), I and S will be displayed as numeric values.

If all three recorder channels (U + I + ϕ) are activated, then I, ϕ, P and Q will be displayed as numeric values.

It is also possible to search for an event in the second recorder menu. If both the date and the time of a certain event are known, this data can be selected in the “Time Search” submenu of the second recorder menu.

After returning to the recorder main menu (by pressing F3 or Enter), the recorder lists the selected time and displays all of the selected electrical measured values as well as the corresponding tap-changes.

Page 53: ba_reg_d_gb

53

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Statistics mode➪ The “F4” key is used to select the “Statistics Mode”.

The total number of tap-changes made since the counter was last set to zero is shown on the display. Thus tap-changes made under load and tap-changes made with a load of less than 5% of the nominal current In (1 A or 5 A) are distinguishable.

Changes made under load are additionally displayed for each tap-change.

NoteIf the tap-changer is working under load (I > 0.05 ⋅ In), a double arrow >> indicates the present tap-changer position.If the load condition is not fulfilled, the present tap-changer position will be indicated by a single arrow “>”.

In conjunction with the recorder, the statistics mode provides valuable information regarding the controlled system.

The parameters “Time factor” and “Permissible regulative deviation” can be used to reach an optimum between the voltage stability and the number of tap-changes. However, this relation cannot be calculated mathematically as it is subject to the individual conditions at the respective feeding point.

Paragramer➪ The “F5” key is used to select the “Paragramer Mode”.

The PARAGRAMER is a tool used for automatically preparing parallel connections and for one-line visualisation of the switching status.

The artificial word PARAGRAMER is derived from the terms parallel and one-line diagram.

The PARAGRAMER displays the switching status of the individual transformers in one-line graphics and can be loaded by pressing the F5 key in the main menu.

��

��

Page 54: ba_reg_d_gb

54

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

The function is activated by feeding a complete busbar replica (positions of the circuit breakers, disconnectors, bus ties and bus couplings) into each Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring by means of binary inputs.

On the basis of the switching statuses, the system can independently recognise which transformer should work in parallel operation with which other transformer(s) on a busbar.

The system treats busbars connected via bus couplings as one single busbar.

As shown in the graphic, both transformers T1 and T3 are working on busbar “a”, whereas transformer T2 is feeding into busbar “b”.

If special crosslinks are needed between the busbars, we recommend that you contact the headquarters of our company A. Eberle GmbH & Co. KG for assistance, since it is not possible to describe all the options in this operating manual.

The “crosslinks” feature is depicted in the graphic. With its assistance, two

busbars may be coupled crosswise.

Setup menus ➪ “MENU” is used to select “SETUP“ menu 1

4.4 Lamp check

➪ Press the “F5” key to check the functions of the light-emitting diodes on the front panel.

NoteThis check can only be carried out in the “Regulator Mode” or “Statistics Mode”.

Crosslink

����

��

Page 55: ba_reg_d_gb

55

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

4.5 Resetting fault signalsTo reset fault signals that occur, the operation mode must be changed from AUTOMATIC to MANUAL and then back to AUTOMATIC again.

4.6 Operating the Recorder

“F1” and “F2” allow access to historical values.

The time and date corresponding to a particular event can be

found by pressing “F1” and “F2” and travelling back along the voltage-time diagram to the time reference line (at the top of the grid), and then reading the values of the time, date, voltage and tap-changing position that are located under the grid.

If historical data is displayed, the term “HIST” appears in the lower left-hand corner of the grid. The displaying of historical values can be cancelled at any time by pressing “ESC (ABORT)”

.

The “F3” key is used to open the Recorder 1 menu, where the size of the scroll displacement (when searching via the

“F1” and “F2” keys in recorder mode) can be set under the menu item “Scroll”. This helps to speed up the search procedure. It is also possible to switch back and forth between “Dual Display” and “MMU display” in the Recorder 1 menu.

Pressing the “F3” key in the Recorder 1 menu will take you to the Recorder 2 menu. In this menu a specific search date and time can be set under the menu item “Time Search”. Different displays (U, U+I or U+I+Phi) can be selected under the menu item “Channel Display”.

After returning to the recorder mode again by pressing “F3” , the time-line diagram for the selected point in time appears.

��

Time-reference line

�� �

�� �

��

�� �

��

��

Page 56: ba_reg_d_gb

56

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

The Recorder 1 and Recorder 2 menus display the present fill level of the memory in “%” as well as in “days”.

Õ

��

Õ

Õ

Õ

��

Õ

Õ

��

Õ

Õ Õ

��

Page 57: ba_reg_d_gb

57

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

The feedrate speed can be selected by pressing the “F4” key. Four different times can be selected: 14 s, 1 min, 5 min, 10 min.

The “dt” values refer to the time which must pass before a scale section (division) is recorded.

��

Õ

Õ

Õ

��

Õ

��

Õ

��

��

dT = 14sdT = 1mdT = 5m

dT = 10m

Page 58: ba_reg_d_gb

58

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

The “F5” “dx” key is used to change the scale of the recorder display.

An extension of WinREG permits the data to be read out.

The data may be filed and stored on the PC from version 1.78 onwards.

In addition to WinREG, MS Excel with the “Storing and Recording” Add-On can also be used as an evaluating program.

NoteIf the note “DEMO” appears in the lower left-hand corner of the grid of the regular recorder display, the recorder is operating in demo mode. In this operation mode, the recorder only records the measured values for a period of 4 - 6 hours. After this period, the older values are replaced by the new ones.

��

Page 59: ba_reg_d_gb

59

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

5 Commissioning

This chapter will help you to become familiar with the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring as quickly as possible.

The following will summarise each parameterisation step that is required during the commissioning stage and indicate the appropriate chapter in this operating manual where further information can be found.

Please follow the order of the commissioning steps.

A summary of the limit values with a short explanation and links to the appropriate chapters can be found on page 82

Whilst the parameterisation can be implemented using the WinREG parameterisation program, this chapter only deals with parameterisation using the device keypad.

The parameters that are particularly important for voltage regulation will be briefly mentioned in seven steps and the parameterisation explained.Further settings that are required in special cases can be found in chapter 7.

After applying the operating voltage, theREG-D will indicate that it is in regulator mode.

Other modes, such as transducer mode, recorder mode, statistics mode and paragramer mode, can be selected at any time.Therefore it is important to realise that all modes run parallel to each other in the background. If one selects the recorder mode (for example), the regulating tasks and all the other paramaterised task settings will also naturally be processed.

Press MENU and then use the keysF2 ... F5 to select the desired mode.

The individual operating modes are briefly described below.

In total, six SETUPs are designed for the parameterisation.You can scroll through the individual SETUPs in the following manner:

Starting at the main menu (regulator, transducer, recorder, statistics or paragramer), press MENU to enter SETUP 1.

Repeatedly pressing the MENU key selects SETUP 2 to SETUP 6.

Page 60: ba_reg_d_gb

60

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

If you are already in one of the SETUPs, you can reach all the other menus by pressing the ← and → keys.

Caution!Please observe the “Warnings and Notes” on page 9 without fail!

Page 61: ba_reg_d_gb

61

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

5.1 Regulator mode

After the auxiliary voltage is applied, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring indicates that it is in regulator mode.

The important parameters for assessing a regulation situation are shown in this display mode.

The tap-changer position and the actual regulative deviation are shown in addition to the actual voltage value. The actual regulative deviation is shown in quasi-analogue form.

If the pointer is at “0” the actual value is the same as the setpoint value. If the regulative deviation is within the tolerance range the pointer is transparent. If the regulative deviation is outside the permissible regulative deviation the pointer changes to black.

In this way one can judge the present condition of the controlled system at a glance.

An alternative display with additional information − the compact display − can be selected using the F1 key.

In addition to the actual value and the tap-changer position, the setpoint value in V (kV) and % as well as the permissible regulative deviation in % are shown in this display.

If you prefer the large display, simply press the F1 key again.

� � � �� � � � � � � ��

� �

� �

� �

� � � �

� � � � � �

� � � � � � �

Page 62: ba_reg_d_gb

62

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

5.2 Transducer mode

Press MENU and then select the transducer mode using the F2 key.

Various important measurement quantities are shown in this mode.

The voltage, current and frequency are independent of the connection of the measurement quantities, whereas the outputs can only be displayed correctly when the measurement sources are correctly entered.

The Relay with feature M1 only gives exact measurement values in equally loaded 3-phase networks. In this case, the transducer emanates from a symmetrical loading of all lines, and measures only one current and one voltage.

For this reason, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring must know the source of the voltages (L1L2, L2L3, L3L1) and currents (L1, L2, L3) in order to be able to take the angle between the input quantities into consideration.

If measurements are to be taken in a 3-phase network loaded according to the requirements of the user, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring must be equipped with feature M2.

NoteThe I · sin ϕ current is particularly important for parallel-switching transformers.

� � � �� � � � � � � ��

� �

� �

� �

� � � �

� � � � � �

� � � � � � �

Page 63: ba_reg_d_gb

63

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

5.3 Recorder mode

The measured line voltage and the tap-changing position are recorded in Recorder mode.

Each second a measurement value that is the arithmetic average of 10 100ms measurements is stored in the memory for the voltage.

The memory capacity is more than 18.7 days, although this time is only valid when each value measured per second differs from the value recorded the previous second.In practice the memory usage is such that at least a month of data can be saved.

The saved values can either be recalled using the keypad, or transferred to a PC and analysed there using the WinREG parameterisation program (e.g. with Excel).

� � � �� � � � � � � ��

� �

� �

� �

� � � �

� � � � � �

� � � � � � �

Page 64: ba_reg_d_gb

64

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

5.4 Statistics mode

In statistics mode, tap-changes under load and tap-changes when idling are differentiated and recorded separately.

The load condition is fulfilled if a current is measured that is 5% larger than the entered nominal value.(Example: for In = 1 A → 50 mA; for In = 5 A → 250 mA).

Under load conditions every tap-change is recorded and displayed.A double arrow before a particular change indicates that the transformer is running under load and is on the displayed level.A single arrow signals that the transformer is idling.

� � � �� � � � � � � ��

� �

� �

� �

� � � �

� � � � � �

� � � � � � �

Page 65: ba_reg_d_gb

65

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

5.5 Paragramer mode

The PARAGRAMER is a tool used for automatically preparing parallel connections and for one-line visualisation of the switching statuses.

The artificial word PARAGRAMER is derived from the terms parallel and one-line diagram.

The PARAGRAMER displays the switching status of the individual transformers in one-line graphics and can be loaded by pressing the F5 key in the main menu.

The function is activated by feeding a complete busbar replica (positions of the circuit breakers, disconnectors, bus ties and bus couplings) into each Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring by means of binary inputs.

On the basis of the switching statuses, the system can independently recognise which transformer should work in parallel operation with which other transformer(s) on a busbar.

The system treats busbars connected via bus couplings as one single busbar.

As shown in the graphic, both transformers T1 and T3 are working on busbar “a”, whereas transformer T2 is feeding into busbar “b”.

� � � �� � � � � � � ��

� �

� �

� �

� � � �

� � � � � �

� � � � � � �

Page 66: ba_reg_d_gb

66

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

5.6 Choosing the languagePlease select SETUP 5, F1, F1

Press F5 to view all of the selectable languages.

Select the desired language with F2 or F4 and confirm the selection using F3.

5.7 Setpoint valueThe REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can manage up to four setpoint values.

However, in general only one fixed value is used.

Please select SETUP 1, F3, F2.

The setpoint value can be increased using F1 and F2 and decreased using F4 and F5.

Press the F3 key if the setpoint value entered should be interpreted as a 100% value.

Press Enter to store the settings.

NoteIf the transformer mounting ratio (Knu) of the voltage transformer is specified in a procedure carried out later, then the primary voltage appears in kV in the second row of the setpoint menu.

Õ

Õ

2 x��

��

��

Page 67: ba_reg_d_gb

67

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

5.8 Permissible regulative deviation Xwz

There are two limits for setting the regulative deviation.

One limit is determined from the acceptable voltage tolerance specified by the consumer, the other is defined by the tap-change increment of the transformer.

The minimum voltage range can be calculated using the following equation:

Xwz: Permissible regulative deviation

If a regulative deviation Xwz that is smaller than the tap-change increment of the transformer is selected, the controlled system can never reach a stable condition; the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring will continue to increment in steps.

Please choose SETUP 1, F1.

The permissible regulative deviation can be increased using F1 and F2 and decreased using F4 and F5.

The parameter is confirmed by pressing Enter.

Xwz[%] ≥ 0.6 · tap-change increment[%]

��

Page 68: ba_reg_d_gb

68

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

5.9 Time behaviourThe golden rule for multiple feeding points is: a calm network

As a consequence, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring should be set up in such a manner that as few switching operations as possible are carried out.

The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can be calmed by increasing either the permissible regulative deviation (Xwz) or the time factor.

However, this course of action has its limits when the interests of the recipients are violated in an impermissible manner (voltage deviations are too large or last too long).

The standard defined reaction time tB must be changed when using the time factor option to influence the number of regulation events.

The default algorithm dU · t = const. ensures that small regulative deviations may be present for a long time, before a tap-change is triggered, whereas large deviations are rectified more quickly.

The time factor has been included as an option to influence the reaction time tB of the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring. The time factor is set to 1 as factory default. The time tB is multiplied with the time factor and the result is the reaction time tv of the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring.

The value of the time factor must be multiplied with the reaction time taken from the diagram.

tv = tB · time factor

Page 69: ba_reg_d_gb

69

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Example:Present regulative deviationXw = 4%; Permissible regulative deviation Xwz = 2%tv = tB · time factor(range of the time factor: 0.1 ... 30see SETUP 1, F2, F3) → with time factor: 1: 15 sec; → with time factor: 2: 30 sec.

NoteIn practice, a time factor between 2 and 3 is used.However, a general recommendation cannot be given, since the correct time factor is dependent on both the network and the customer configuration.

Please select SETUP 1, F2, F3 and enter the time factor using F1, F2 and F4, F5.

Rea

ctio

n tim

e t B

[sec

] for

tim

e fa

ctor

: 1

25

20

15

10

5

00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10Present regulative deviation UW [%]

Set permissible regulative deviation

Page 70: ba_reg_d_gb

70

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Confirm your choice by pressing Enter.

The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring offers several time programs. In addition to the default-selected dU · t = const. integral method, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring offers a fast integral method, a linear method and a further method working with a fixed times that can be found under the name CONST.

If CONST is selected, all regulative deviations that lie outside the tolerance band and that are smaller than the selected permissible deviation are rectified within time T1. For larger regulative deviations, however, the time will be T2.

Example:The selected permissible regulative deviation is ±1%.Reaction time T1 is valid in the range from 1% to 2%. The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring carries out tap-changes according to the time selected for T2 if the regulative deviation is larger than 2% (calculated from the setpoint value!).

For further information see page 247.

��

Page 71: ba_reg_d_gb

71

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

5.10 Backward high-speed switchingWhile the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is operating according to the algorithm dU · t = const., events will always be regulated such that the next tap-change will be triggered after a short time for large deviations and after a long time for small deviations.

Example:

The curve below gives a time of 42 s, the time within which the fault will be rectified.High-speed switching can be used to reduce this time.If, in the above example, the high-speed switching limit were set to 6%, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring would switch the voltage back to the permissible range of the voltage tolerance band as soon as this limit is reached and the selected time delay for high-speed mode has passed.

Permissible regulative deviation Xwz: 1%

Present regulative deviation Xw: +6%

Time factor: 1

Tap-change increment of the transformer: 1.5%

Rea

ctio

n tim

e t B

[sec

] for

tim

e fa

ctor

: 1 25

20

15

10

5

00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10Present regulative deviation UW [%]

Tap-change 1

Tap-change 2

Tap-change 3

Tap-change 4 Set permissible regulative deviation

Page 72: ba_reg_d_gb

72

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Diagram:Present regulative deviationXw = 6%; Permissible regulative deviation Xwz = 1%tv = tB · time factor→ with time factor: 1:

1st tap-change after 5 s2nd tap-change after 7 s3rd tap-change after 10 s4th tap-change after 20 s___________________________Total time = 42 s

Please select SETUP 3, F4 and select backward high-speed switching using F3. Then enter the desired limit as a % of the setpoint value.

Confirm your choice by pressing Enter.

The time delay can be set in SETUP 4, F4 after backward high-speed switching has been activated.

Confirm your choice by pressing Enter.

��

��

Page 73: ba_reg_d_gb

73

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

5.11 Tap-changer running timeIf the high-speed switching limit is reached, then the running time of the tap-changer determines the time required for the voltage to return to being within the tolerance band.

If the running time of the tap-changer is specified, other control signals can be prevented from being output when the tap-changer is running.

Old tap-changing devices in particular may occasionally respond with an EMERGENCY STOP signal, if a further control signal is input at the same moment that the tap-changer is changing to a new position.

The running time of the tap-changer can be entered in menu AddOns-1.

Please select SETUP 5, F1.

If the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is operating in high-speed switching mode, two seconds will be added to the entered running time. The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring will not issue a new control command until this entire running time has elapsed.

NoteThis function will be carried out by the (PAN-D) voltage monitoring unit if the unit is present in the regulating system.

Extension:Two further settings in SETUP 5 enable the running time of the tap-changer to be monitored.

The tap-change in operation lamp (TC) signal can be connected to one of the freely programmable inputs (E3 in this case).(SETUP 5, F3).

��

Page 74: ba_reg_d_gb

74

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

A freely programmable relay (in this case relay 5) can be used for fault reporting (TC-Err).

TC-Err+ → transmits a wiping signal in the event of a fault

TC-Err. → transmits a permanent signal in the event of afault

This signal can be used to stop the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring or turn off the motor drive.

��

��

Page 75: ba_reg_d_gb

75

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

5.12 Knx transformer mounting ratios and transformer connection

This point can be skipped if only the secondary transformer voltage is required for regulation and the transducer functions of the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring are not required.

In all other cases, the transformer mounting ratios and the “sources” of both the current and the voltage must be named.

If it is specified via the REG-D menu that the current transformer is connected to external connector L3 and that the voltage to be measured is between L1 and L2, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring corrects the 90° angle by itself and delivers the correct values for all the outputs and for the reactive current I · sin ϕ.

Please select SETUP 5, F2, F1

Select the source of the voltage that is to be regulated using F2 or F4 and confirm the selection by using F3 or Enter.

Knu is the quotient of the input voltage and the output voltage of the voltage transformer and ensures that the primary voltage is displayed (e.g. 20 kV and not 100V).

Select the transformer mounting ratio Knu using F2 or F4 and confirm the selection with the ENTER key.

Õ

Õ

��

Page 76: ba_reg_d_gb

76

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Select SETUP 5, F2, F2

Example:

Knu = 20 kV / 0.1 kV

Knu = 200

The voltage is measured by the voltage transformer between L2 and L3, and the current transformer is connected to phase L3.

➪ Select SETUP 5, F2

➪ Select the voltage L2L3 using F1 and confirm the selection using F3

➪ Select the transformer mounting ratio Knu using F2 and confirm the selection with the ENTER key

➪ Select the current transformer mounting location L3 using F3 and confirm the selection with F3

� �

Primary voltage: 20 kV

Secondary voltage: 100 V

Page 77: ba_reg_d_gb

77

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

5.13 Setting the nominal currentIn general it is not necessary to supply the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring with a current to perform voltage regulation.If, however, a current-dependent setpoint adjustment is required or the output data should be displayed, a power supply must be provided.The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can operate with 1 A and 5 A input signals.

Please select SETUP 5, F2, F4.

Confirm the selection with the ENTER key.

Caution!Please note: in addition to the software setting, a jumper must also be placed in the correct position on the REG-NTZ2 terminal block for the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring.

In the case of the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring, the number of current transformers to be connected is determined by the hardware feature selected.

��

AssignmentWith jumper Without jumper

Page 78: ba_reg_d_gb

78

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

In normal applications, only subprint M1 is equipped. In cases such as, for example, when three-phase current networks loaded according to the requirements of the user or triple-wound applications are to be operated, subprint M2 is equipped as well and must be set to the nominal current transformer value in the same way.

Kni is the quotient of the input current and the output current of the current transformer.

Example:

Kni = 600 A / 5 A

Kni = 120

Please select SETUP 5, F2, F5

Confirm the selection with the ENTER key.

Primary current: 600 A

Secondary current: 5 A

��

Page 79: ba_reg_d_gb

79

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

5.14 Inhibit low limit

Scenario:The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring operates with a 110 kV / 20 kV transformer.

Problems on the high voltage side cause the voltage to break down slowly.

The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring rectifies this and increases the tap-changes of the transformer, to stabilise the voltage on the secondary side at 20 kV.

As soon as a fault on the primary side is eliminated, the primary voltage jumps back to the original voltage value.

However, since tap changes in the direction of a higher voltage were carried out as a result of the voltage breakdown (amongst other things), the secondary voltage is so high that problems on the secondary side can no longer be precluded (protective relay triggered, etc.).

Requirement:If the voltage that is to be regulated falls beneath a particular limit due to a fault on the primary or secondary side, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring shouldn’t undertake further attempts to raise the voltage.

This requirement can only be achieved using the inhibit low limit.

Please select SETUP 3, F5.

F1, F2 and F4, F5 can be used to enter a percentage value beneath which the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring does not try to rectify a voltage breakdown.As soon as the voltage increases above the entered value

��

Page 80: ba_reg_d_gb

80

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

again, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring automatically restarts the regulation by itself.

In order to prevent short-term voltage breakdowns triggering the inhibit low of the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring, a time delay after which the inhibit low will be activated can be entered in SETUP 4, F5 using F1, F2, F4 or F5.

Please select SETUP 4, F5.

Example:Setpoint value 100 V

If a voltage of < 90 V occurs for a period longer than 10 seconds, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring should change to inhibit low.

Input of inhibit low limit:SETUP 3, F5 Input: -10%

Time delay input:SETUP 4, F5 Input: 10 seconds

��

Page 81: ba_reg_d_gb

81

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

5.15 TriggeringThe trigger limit describes the entered voltage as an absolute value, above which the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring suppresses all control commands.

The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring automatically starts regulation by itself if the voltage falls beneath this value (see also page 236).

Please select SETUP 3, F3

Select the trigger value using the F1, F2 and F4, F5 keys and confirm the selection using the ENTER key.

Please select SETUP 4, F3

Choose the time delay for the triggering using the F1, F2 and F4, F5 keys and confirm the selection using the ENTER key.

The limit signals can also be connected to the relay outputs / binary outputs (see “Relay assignments” on page 139).In addition, the “Trigger” signal can also be indicated by the programmable LEDs (see “LED assignments” on page 141).

��

��

Page 82: ba_reg_d_gb

82

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

5.16 Short description of the individual limit values, the setpoint values and the permissible regulative deviation.

5.16.1 Description of the individual settings

Setpoint value:The value that the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring should regulate the voltage to.

The setpoint value can be displayed in primary or secondary values.

Secondary values: e.g. 100V or 110V

Primary values: e.g. 11 kV, 20 kV, 33 kV, 110 kV

The primary values can be displayed by parameterising the transformer mounting ratio Knu (0.01 ... 4000)

Setting range of the voltage setpoint values: 60 ... 140 V

Further information: see “Setpoints” on page 105

Trigger

Backward high-speed switching

>U

Permissible regulative deviatio<UForward high-speed switchingUndervoltage inhibit low

Tap-changes

G1

G2

G4

G3

G8

Setpoint

G6

RaiseLower

Page 83: ba_reg_d_gb

83

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Permissible regulative deviation Xwz:Since the transformer mounting ratio of a tap-change transformer cannot be continuously changed, there must be a voltage range surrounding the setpoint that the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring cannot affect.

This range is designated as the permissible tolerance band or the permissible regulative deviation.

The lower limit of the tolerance band depends on the tap-changing increments of the transformer.

If the tolerance band is set so that it is smaller than the tap-changing increment, then the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring “hunts” the setpoint value and repeatedly steps away from the tolerance band in both positive and negative directions.

If, on the other hand, the entered tolerance band is too large, it could lead to complaints from consumers because the voltage fluctuates over a large range.

Setting range: 0.1 ... 10%

The entered percent value always refers to the selected setpoint value.

Further information: see “Permissible regulative deviation” on page 103

Trigger (G1):“Triggering” describes an upper absolute voltage limit, which causes the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring to stop carrying out tap-changes.

The limit is described on the display in plain text and if required it can also activate a relay that either triggers a protective device or simply delivers the information to the control panel.

The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring operates in the normal manner if the voltage is below the limit.

The setting range of the trigger is 100 ... 150 V (can only be entered as a secondary value!).

The voltage is to understood as the output voltage of the voltage transformer on the secondary side of the transformer and can only be entered as an absolute value.

Page 84: ba_reg_d_gb

84

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Reason: If the “trigger” limit were based on the setpoint value (for example) and several setpoint values were used, the trigger limit would “wander” with the setpoint.

If, however, there is a fixed limit for the voltage above which the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is stopped and a protective element is triggered, it is an absolute value rather than a relative value.

Further information: see “Trigger inhibit high (highest limit value of the voltage)” on page 113

Backward high-speed switching (G2):If the voltage leaves the tolerance band, a particular time program is activated. The time program defines the amount of time that must elapse before the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring outputs the first (and possibly further) control commands.

All time programs are based on the assumption that large voltage deviations are rectified quickly and small deviations are rectified slowly.

The backward high-speed switching limit defines the voltage above which the time program is ignored and the transformer is regulated back to the voltage band in high-speed time by the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring. The voltage band is defined by the “permissible regulative deviation” parameter.

The high-speed time is defined by the running time of the transformer per switching process.

If a tap-change in operation lamp is connected, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring waits until the lamp has turned off before the next tap-change occurs. If there is no tap-change in operation lamp connected, the switching frequency is determined by the maximum time TC in operation parameter (SETUP 5, F1, F2)

Setting range: 0 ... +35% *

Further information: see “High-speed switching when overvoltage occurs (LOWER)” on page 114

Page 85: ba_reg_d_gb

85

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Forward high-speed switching (G3):If the voltage leaves the tolerance band, a particular time program is activated. The time program defines the amount of time that must elapse before the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring outputs the first (and possibly further) control commands.

All time programs are based on the assumption that large voltage deviations are rectified quickly and small deviations are rectified slowly.

The forward high-speed switching limit defines the voltage above which the time program is ignored and the transformer is regulated back to the voltage band in high-speed time by the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring. The voltage band is defined by the “permissible regulative deviation” parameter.

The high-speed time is defined by the running time of the transformer per switching process.

If a tap-change in operation lamp is connected, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring waits until the lamp has turned off before the next tap-change occurs. If there is no tap-change in operation lamp connected, the switching frequency is determined by the maximum time TC in operation parameter (SETUP 5, F1, F2)

Setting range: -35% ... 0% *

Further information: see “High-speed switching when undervoltage occurs (RAISE)” on page 114

Overvoltage >U (G4):The overvoltage >U is a limit value that only influences the regulation in special operating circumstances, and that can be parameterised if required using an LED or an output relay.

If the voltage exceeds the >U limit, all “raise” commands are surpressed.

The limit value particularly influences the regulation if operating with several setpoints and using an absolute value (100 V / 110 V) as the limit value for >U.

Setting range: 0 ... +25% *

Page 86: ba_reg_d_gb

86

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Further information: see “> U Overvoltage” on page 112

Undervoltage <U (G6):The undervoltage <U is a limit value that only influences the regulation in special operating circumstances, and that can be parameterised if required using an LED or an output relay.

If the voltage falls below the <U limit, all “lower” commands are surpressed.

The limit value particularly influences the regulation if operating with several setpoints and using an absolute value (100 V / 110 V) as the limit value for <U.

Setting range: -25% ... 0% *

Further information: see “< U Undervoltage” on page 111

Inhibit low (G8):If the voltage falls below the undervoltage inhibit low limit, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring switches to a standstill.

The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring operates in the normal manner as long as the voltage is above the limit.

Setting range: -75% ... 0% *

Further information: see “Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring inhibit low when undervoltage occurs” on page 115

* The percent values relate to the appropriate setpoint value, 100 V or 110 V.

Select the reference value in SETUP 5, Add-On 5, F2

Page 87: ba_reg_d_gb

87

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

6 Basic Settings

The following are considered to be basic settings of the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring: Time, password, interfaces (COM1, COM2, E-LAN), LCD contrast, etc.

All of the basic settings can be defined and modified in “SETUP” menu 6.

6.1 General

6.1.1 Station ID

NoteRelays which are operated on a bus (E-LAN) must be identified by different addresses (A ... Z4).

��

��

A to Z4

Page 88: ba_reg_d_gb

88

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

6.1.2 Station name

NoteThe Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring name is best entered using WinREG. However, it can also be entered using the Relay keypad and the following procedure.

Õ

��

Õ

��

`

��

Page 89: ba_reg_d_gb

89

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

6.1.3 Setting the time/date

6.1.4 LCD contrast (display)

Õ

��

��

��

Page 90: ba_reg_d_gb

90

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

6.1.5 PasswordThe password prevents changes to individual settings. Measurements and parameters can, however, be read without restrictions.

The password lock is activated after approx. 4 min.

NoteUser 1 may change all passwords at will, whereas all of the other users can only change their own personal password.

Deleting passwordsEnter “111111”.

It is only possible to delete a password if user 1 has “opened” the device with his/her password!

NoteThis procedure switches off the entire password request (including that of other users!).The passwords of users 2 to 5 (only) are deleted.

Page 91: ba_reg_d_gb

91

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Password request

Wrong password

6.1.6 Deleting recorder data(resetting the measured value memory)

6.1.7 Deleting tap-change sums(resetting the tap-counter to zero)

��

��EnterCorrectPassword

The recordermemory will

i h “R ”

be deleted afterpressing

��

��

The total number oftap-changes will

i h “R ”

be reset to zeroafter pressing

Page 92: ba_reg_d_gb

92

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

6.1.8 Actual value correction of the measuringvoltage UE

The actual value correction of the measuring voltage is designed to compensate for the line resistance and to correct measuring transducer errors.

6.1.9 Actual value correction of the measuringcurrent IE

The actual value correction of the measuring current corrects errors in the measuring transducer.

NoteIf the parameters are read out and archived via WinREG, the values of the actual value corrections will be missing, because they can only be assigned to a certain device and are not transferable to other devices!

��

��

��

Page 93: ba_reg_d_gb

93

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

6.2 RS-232 Interfaces

6.2.1 COM 1The COM 1 interface is normally used to parameterise the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring with the help of the WinREG software.

Õ

Õ

��

��

Page 94: ba_reg_d_gb

94

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

6.2.2 COM 2COM 2 is suitable for connecting a REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring or a REGSys regulation system (several Relays and monitoring units) to a higher-level control system.If the COM 2 interface is used for permanent connections to a higher-level control system, the COM 1 interface is available for connecting a PC, a printer or a modem.

The standard mode is the “MODE ECL”. DCF77 is only selectable if the time is to be synchronised via DCF77.

��

��

Õ

Õ

Page 95: ba_reg_d_gb

95

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

If the information of the E-LANs (LAN-L, LAN-R) is to be rerouted to the serial interface, for example to achieve modem transmissions on the “E-LAN level”, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring must be set to LAN-L or LAN-R. A more detailed description has been omitted here since these types of connections should always be realised with the support of our company A. Eberle GmbH & Co. KG.

“PROFESSIONAL” is always the right setting for the COM, if a PROFIBUS-DP connection is to be realised.In this case an external PROFIBUS-DP module is controlled via COM 1 or COM 2.

The setting ECL+HP enables output which is generated via a background program to also be output via COM 2.

Example:Based on the regulated voltage or the tap-changer position, a specific text is to be output via COM 2. In this case, ECL+HP is to be selected, since all output which is generated via a background program is normally output via COM 1.

��

��

Page 96: ba_reg_d_gb

96

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

6.3 E-LAN (Energy-Local Area Network)For background information on the “E-LAN”, please see page 258.

Every Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring has two complete E-LAN interfaces.

E-LAN LEFT defines the settings for bus left(socket connector 6, terminals b6, b8, b10 and b12 see page 33).

E-LAN RIGHT defines the settings for bus right(socket connector 6, terminals z6, z8, z10 and z12 see page 33).

Each one of these E-LAN interfaces also functions with either a 2-wire line or 4-wire transmission technology (RS485).

A 2-wire line is normally used, because this is the only system that allows one bus configuration with several stations on the same bus line. To do so, the integrated terminating resistor of the first and the last stations on the bus line must be switched on. (Selection: “terminated”)

Socket connector 6

BUS-L Terminal

BUS-R Terminal

Function 2-wire 4-wire

b6 z6 EA+ Input and output “+” Output “+”

b8 z8 EA- Input and output “-” Output “-”

b10 z10 E+ No function Input “+”

b12 z12 E- No function Input “-”

��

Page 97: ba_reg_d_gb

97

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Normal functioning of the bus would be impossible without a terminating resistor due to the reflections which would then appear on the end of each line.

4-wire transmission technology must be used for long transmission distances or if boosters (amplifiers for increasing the signal level over very long transmission distances must be used). The required terminating resistances will be automatically activated (the selection “terminated” is no longer required).

��

��

Õ

Õ

��

��

Page 98: ba_reg_d_gb

98

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

6.4 PAN-D voltage monitoring unit

(See appendix for REG-D / PAN-D circuit diagram)

The PAN-D monitoring unit is not equipped for entering the parameters via the screen and keypad.

If a PAN-D monitoring unit is used in connection with a REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring connected via E-LAN, the monitoring unit “borrows” the keypad and the screen from the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring for parameterising and displaying values.

Use the F4 key to start this process.

��

��

��

Parameterisation ofPAN - D (refer toPAN - D operating manual)

Page 99: ba_reg_d_gb

99

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

6.5 Status(actual ID data of the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring)

The menu item “Status” lists all of the information which is important for the system identification.

In addition to the firmware version and the status of the battery, etc., the actual input status of both input circuits is monitored as a hexadecimal number in the REG-D status (1).

This information is particularly useful for commissioning. The hexadecimal numbers should be interpreted as follows:

The input status shown above would be displayed in the status as HEX AF7D.

During the initial commissioning of the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring, this enables clarification as to whether or not a signal has been sent to the terminals.

REG-IN1 gives information about the present input situation ofterminal block 2 (REG-EA)in hexadecimal numbers.

Inputs Inputs Inputs Inputs

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Signal Signal Signal Signal

x − x − x x x x − x x x x x − x

Significance Significance Significance Significance

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

= HEX A = HEX F = HEX 7 = HEX D

x = ON− = OFF

��

Page 100: ba_reg_d_gb

100

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

REG-IN2 gives information about the present input situation ofterminal block 4 (REG-STU)in hexadecimal numbers.

Use the arrow key to open a window, in which the active device features are listed.

Use the arrow key to open a window which shows the parameterisation of the COM 1 and COM 2 interfaces.

Use the arrow key to open a window which shows the parameterisation of the ELAN interfaces.

Page 101: ba_reg_d_gb

101

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Use the arrow key to open a window which shows the parameterisation of the COM 3 interface.

Use the arrow key to open a window which shows the logbook.

All important events are stored in the log together with the respective time and date. Up to 127 events can be stored in total. The LOG memory is a First In First Out (FIFO) rotating memory, i.e. if the memory is full, the oldest entry will be replaced with the newest event.Use the keys F2 ... F5 to search for a particular entry.

The following events are saved with a time and date:

Power ONManualAutomaticLocalRemote< U< U> IForward high-speed switchingBackwards high-speed switchingTriggerInhibit Low

Page 102: ba_reg_d_gb

102

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7 Parameterisation of the REG-D

The most important steps for the parameterisation are also described in the separate short-form operating manual in chapter “Commissioning” on page 59.

➪ The operation modes “LOCAL” and “MANUAL” must be set in order to enter parameters.

NoteChanges to the parameters are only accepted when in “MANUAL OPERATION MODE” .When the password request is activated, a valid password must be entered (for information on the password request see “Password request” on page 91).

For further information on the Operating principle, please see page 47.

Page 103: ba_reg_d_gb

103

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.1 Permissible regulative deviationFor background information on the “permissible regulative deviation”, please see page 233.

7.2 Time behaviour (regulation behaviour)

7.2.1 Time factorFor background information on the “Time Factor”, please see page 257.

��

��

Page 104: ba_reg_d_gb

104

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.2.2 Time programFor background information on the time program, see page 247.

7.2.3 Trend memoryFor background information, see “Trend memory” on page 251.

Õ

Õ

Õ

Õ

��

Page 105: ba_reg_d_gb

105

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.3 SetpointsFor background information on the “setpoint value” (command variable) please see page 222.

Display of the setpoint valueIf the primary value (the single-underlined value (here: 15 kV)) should be displayed rather than the secondary value, the transformer mounting ratio must be entered in the menu “Transformer configuration” on page 131.

7.3.1 1st setpoint value

The U-LL voltage always corresponds to the phase-to-phase voltage (delta voltage).

Example: The setpoint should be 100.2 V. This value should be simultaneously declared as the 100% value.

How to proceed: Using the keys F1, F2, F3 and F4 set the double-underlined value to100.2 V.Use the F3 key to set the 100.2 V value as the 100% valueand confirm the value by pressing the

“RETURN” key.

��

Page 106: ba_reg_d_gb

106

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.3.2 Further setpoint values

Proceed accordingly with the 2nd, 3rd and 4th setpoint values.

When switching from one setpoint value to another, tap-changing commands will also be output at the same time until the voltage lies within the tolerance band around the new setpoint value. The time interval between two successive tap-changes is determined by the maximum time TC in operation (SETUP 5, Add-On 1).

If the regulation is being operated with the PAN-D voltage monitoring unit, the maximum time TC in operation must always be entered directly on the PAN-D when both units are connected via E-LAN.

NoteThe REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can regulate outputs (P or Q) as well as voltages. This situation will always occur if a phase-shift transformer is used. For this reason the PQCTRL feature must be loaded. Setpoint 3 will then become a P setpoint, and setpoint 4 will become a Q setpoint. The individual setpoints can be selected via the binary inputs, via the COM 1 and COM 2 interfaces or via one of the available protocols (IEC ...., DNP, MODBUS, SPABUS, etc).

��

��

Page 107: ba_reg_d_gb

107

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.4 Programs(parameters for parallel transformerregulation)

For background information on “Parallel Programs”, please see page 262.

7.4.1 Selection of the parallel programs (regulation programs)

��

Õ

Õ

Page 108: ba_reg_d_gb

108

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.4.2 Parameters for the parallel programDifferent parameter menus are available depending on the selected parallel program.

The following menu appears for the ΔI · sinϕ (circulating current minimisation) program.

Control influence (Icirc monitoring)For further information about setting the permissible circulating reactive current, please see page 266.

LimitationThe “Limitation” menu item only appears when the Δcosϕ program is selected.

��

��

Page 109: ba_reg_d_gb

109

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Net cos ϕThe “Limitation” menu item only appears when the Δcosϕ program is selected.

Nominal power of the transformerThe “Limitation” menu item only appears when the ΔIsinϕ(S) program is selected.

Group list (of parallel-switched transformers)The group list must be entered for all programs, with the exception of the Δcosϕ procedure.

Relays with the same prefixes before the identification (address) are operating on one busbar. In this example, transformers A, B and C are feeding on the same busbar.

��

��

��

Page 110: ba_reg_d_gb

110

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.4.3 Current influence (line-drop compensation)For background information, please see see “Determining the voltage levels XR and Uf” on page 226.

The gradient and the limitation for the current influences, apparent current, active current and reactive current, are entered in Setup 1 (F1 and F2).

7.4.4 LDC parameter R (line-drop compensation)For background information, please see see “Measuring the voltage drop as a function of the current strength and cos ϕ” on page 224.

7.4.5 LDC parameter X (line-drop compensation)For background information, please see see “Measuring the voltage drop as a function of the current strength and cos ϕ” on page 224.

Õ

Õ

��

��

��

Page 111: ba_reg_d_gb

111

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.5 Gradient (U/I characteristic)For background information on the “Gradient”,please see page 227.

7.6 Limitation (U/I characteristic)For background information on the “Limitation”,please see page 227.

7.7 < U UndervoltageFor background information on “< U Undervoltage”,please see page 238.

��

��

Page 112: ba_reg_d_gb

112

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.8 > U OvervoltageFor background information on “> U Overvoltage”,please see page 237.

7.9 > I, < Limit (upper and lower current limits)For background information on “> I, < I limit value”, please see page 238.

��

��

��

Page 113: ba_reg_d_gb

113

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.10 Trigger inhibit high(highest limit value of the voltage)

For background information on the “trigger”, please see page 236.

Please note that the trigger must be entered as an absolute value.

Reason: The respective setpoint is normally used as a reference for setting the limit value.

However, if multiple setpoints are used, the trigger limit “wanders” between the selected setpoints.

In general there is only one voltage − independent of the selected setpoint − which triggers a transformer or outputs a message, thus it is always better to enter the trigger limit in V.

��

Page 114: ba_reg_d_gb

114

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.11 High-speed switching during undervoltage/overvoltage

7.11.1 High-speed switching when undervoltage occurs (RAISE)

For background information about forward high-speed switching, please see page 237.

7.11.2 High-speed switching when overvoltage occurs (LOWER)

For background information about backward high-speed switching, please see page 236.

��

��

��

Page 115: ba_reg_d_gb

115

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.12 Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring inhibit low when undervoltage occurs

For background information on “Inhibit Low”,please see page 239.

7.13 Time delays (limit signals)

NoteEach parameter or limit value can function with an individual switching delay!

7.13.1 Time Delay > UFor background information on the time delay,please see to page 235.

��

��

Page 116: ba_reg_d_gb

116

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.13.2 Time delay < UFor background information on the time delay,please see page 235.

7.13.3 Time delay > I, < I limit valueFor background information on the time delay, please see page 235.

7.13.4 Time delay triggerFor background information on the time delay,please see page 235.

��

��

Page 117: ba_reg_d_gb

117

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.13.5 Time delay forward high-speed switchingFor background information on the time delay, please see page 235.

7.13.6 Time delay backward high-speed switchingFor background information on the switching delay, please see page 235.

��

��

��

Page 118: ba_reg_d_gb

118

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.13.7 Time delay inhibit lowFor background information on the time delay,please see page 235.

7.14 Add-Ons (Relay behaviour)The various parameterisations are summarised under the “Add-Ons” menu item.

This menu item contains parameters that cannot be assigned to other parameter groups. Furthermore, it contains some parameters that could be assigned to particular parameter groups, but which were not included where one might expect to find them out of consideration of the existing SETUP structure.

Therefore “Add-Ons” is a collection of parameters and special functions that are often used for special customer requirements.

In any cases, we recommend having an overview of the individual screens.

7.14.1 Overview of the Add-Ons menus numbers 1 to 6“Add-Ons” contains six sub-menus (Add-On 1 to Add-On 6 that can be selected using the F1 key.

��

��

Page 119: ba_reg_d_gb

119

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

��

��

��

��

Page 120: ba_reg_d_gb

120

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.14.2 Maximum time TC in operation (motor drive running time)

The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can be used to monitor the running time of the motor drive (tap-changer). If the set maximum time has run out, a signal will be triggered. This signal can be used to switch off the motor drive. This protects the tap-changer against passing through all cycles.

If the PAN-D monitoring unit is connected, the maximum time TC in operation can only be set using the PAN-D (refer to the PAN-D operating manual). For operation without PAN-D, the running time can be monitored via the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring. To do this, first enter the maximum running time of the tap-changer per tap in “Add-On 1”. The maximum time TC in operation signal can then be assigned to an input (refer to input assignments (binary inputs) or see “Input assignments (binary inputs)” on page 138). Finally, the message “tap-changer interrupted” can be output via a relay output (see “Relay assignments” on page 139).

There are two ways to parameterise the relay:

1. “Maximum Time of Tap-Changer in Operation-F” outputs a continuous message when the specified maximum time is exceeded.

2. “Maximum Time of Tap-Changer in Operation-F+” outputs a temporary message when the specified maximum time is exceeded.

Page 121: ba_reg_d_gb

121

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.14.3 Manual/Automatic

The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring offers two different options for switching between the Manual and AUTOMATIC operation modes.

In addition to the options already described above, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can also naturally be switched using the serial COM interfaces or the IEC-, DNP-... protocols.

If you wish to use a serial connection, it is always advisable to contact our headquarters.

Flip/Flop switching behaviourIn the “E5: PULSE” position, a pulse at input E5 (b10/z10) (see page 26) causes a changeover from “MANUAL” to “AUTOMATIC”. A further pulse at this input would cause a change-over from “AUTOMATIC” back to “MANUAL”, i.e. each pulse changes the operating mode.

Bistable Switching BehaviourIn the “E5-A/E6-H” setting, a pulse or continuous signal to input E5 (b10/z10) (see page 26) causes a changeover from “MANUAL” to “AUTOMATIC”. Further signals do not change the operation mode, e.g. the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring remains in the “AUTOMATIC” operation mode.

The changeover from “AUTOMATIC” to “MANUAL” is carried out via a pulse or a continuous signal to input E6 (b12/z12) (see page 26). Further signals do not change the operation mode, e.g. the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring remains in the “MANUAL” operation mode.

Õ

Õ

��

Page 122: ba_reg_d_gb

122

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.14.4 Tap-changing

OFF“OFF” is selected if no signals are available for displaying the tap-changer position.

Two dashes “--” appear on the display in Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring mode.

If the software switch for the tap-changes is set to “ON”, yet there is no tap-change information available, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring displays tap-change 0. Such a display could cause operating personnel to come to wrong conclusions.

ONIf BCD-coded signals are available for displaying the tap-changer position, please select the “ON” position.

In the regulator mode, the display shows the tap-changer position.

NoteIf an error occurs (BCD signals are available and the tap-changer parameter is set to “ON”), please check the connections and the selected “input assignment”.

Please also observe that the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring automatically checks the correctness of the tap-changer position.However, the tap-changer must be turned on.

The error message “TapErr” is displayed to indicate incorrect tap-changer settings.

TapErr is activated if an illogical tap-change is signalled.

TapErr is only intended to be informative, since the correct display of tap-changes is not essential for the regulation of individual transformers.

Õ

Õ

��

Page 123: ba_reg_d_gb

123

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

However, it the TapErr signal is linked to a relay which has set the Relay to the manual mode, regulation could be interrupted when a tap error is detected.

Further information can be found on page 181 and page 283.

7.14.5 Self-Conduction of the operation mode

WITHWITH” stores the operation mode of the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring in the event that the auxiliary voltage fails. This means that after the voltage returns, the Relay will be reset to “AUTOMATIC” if it was in “AUTOMATIC” operation mode before the voltage failure and will be reset to “MANUAL” if it was previously in “MANUAL” operation mode.

WITHOUTWITHOUT” does not store the operation mode if the auxiliary voltage fails. This means that the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring will always be in the “MANUAL” operation mode after the voltage returns.

7.14.6 Current Display (of the Transformer)

��

Page 124: ba_reg_d_gb

124

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

ONIn the “ON” setting, the current can also be displayed in the Relay display (compact display).

OFFIn order to prevent 0.000 A from being displayed for a faulty current connection, the current display can be surpressed.

7.14.7 LCD saver (display)

OnThe display turns off one hour after the keypad was last used.

However, the background illumination turns off approximately 15 minutes after the keypad was last used.

OFFThe screen always remains on; only the background illumination turns off approximately 15 minutes after the keypad was last used.

7.14.8 Regulator mode: large display

��

��

Page 125: ba_reg_d_gb

125

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

OFFThe option of choosing the detailed view will be offered on the display.

ONCompared to the detailed display, the large display only shows the current voltage and tap-changer position.

NoteThe F1 key can be used to switch between the normal and the large display size when in regulator mode.

7.14.9 Language selection

��

��

Õ

Õ

Page 126: ba_reg_d_gb

126

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.14.10 Parallel Program Activation

The parallel program can be activated either by selecting “ON” from the menu or via a binary signal.

Selecting “LEVEL” ensures that the parallel program remains activated as long as the signal level is sent to the selected input.

“PULSE” switches the activation ON and OFF.

The type of parallel program activation described in this section is the simplest type of activation. However, this can often not meet the requirements of actual use. For this reason, we request that you primarily refer to the information in Chapter 9.

7.14.11 Up/down relay on time

If the Relay outputs a tap-changing signal, the standard switch-on time of the tap-changing pulse is 2s.

Older motor drives in particular often need a longer switch-on time.

This menu item can be used to set the switch-on time for higher and lower pulses from 0.5 s to 6 s in increments of 0.1 s.

Õ

Õ

Õ

Õ

Page 127: ba_reg_d_gb

127

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.14.12 AUTO(MATIC) LOCK in the event of an E-LAN error

If an E-LAN error is detected by the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring when, for example, running in parallel with multiple transformers, the respective Relay changes from “AUTOMATIC” to “MANUAL”. The “AUTO lock in event of ELAN error” function ensures that it is only possible to change back to “AUTOMATIC” when the error has been rectified or when the “AUTO lock in event of ELAN error” is switched from ON to OFF.

7.14.13 Setpoint adjustment

The setpoint value is normally entered via the menu.

If the setpoint value has to be changed for operational reasons,

it is possible to increase or decrease it using the left (lower)

or right (raise) arrow keys, without having to use the more lengthy corresponding SETUP method.

The percent values set in menu Add-On 3 determine the size of the increment/decrement of the setpoint value.

Example:If 0.5% is set, the setpoint value will be increased or decreased by 0.5% each time one of the arrow keys is pressed.

��

Õ

Õ

��

Page 128: ba_reg_d_gb

128

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.14.14 Creeping net breakdownFor background information on “Creeping Net Breakdown”, please see page 242.

Firmware versions 2.04 and above can derive the creeping net breakdown from the overvoltage.

However, this function can only be achieved if the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is equipped with two voltage transformers (feature M+)

The voltage input on the undervoltage side takes care of the load-dependent regulation, whilst the voltage input on the overvoltage side “serves” the creeping net breakdown function.

Recognition

Lock Time

��

Page 129: ba_reg_d_gb

129

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Time Slice

Number of Changes

7.14.15 Limit base (reference value)For background information on the “limit base”, please see page 239.

��

��

Õ

Õ

Page 130: ba_reg_d_gb

130

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.14.16 Setting the Relay to inhibit low if <I or >IFor background information on “setting inhibit low when <I or >I”, please refer to overcurrent on page 239.

7.14.17 Maximum tap difference (monitoring)A maximum tap-change difference may be set for the ΔIsinϕ and the ΔIsinϕ(S) parallel programs. An alarm can be output during parallel switching if the difference between the transformer tap-change levels exceeds the entered maximum value. The parallel-operating group will change to MANUAL.

Please connect the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring so that an optical display of the situation is possible if too large a tap difference occurs.

For this purpose you can either assign the “ParErr” function to one of the freely-programmable LEDs or activate a plain text message on the Relay screen.

A background program is required for the plain text solution which can be found in our Toolbox or which can be ordered from our headquarters at any time.

The LED can be set up via SETUP 5, F5.

Please select the parameter 30: ParErr.

Õ

Õ

��

��

Page 131: ba_reg_d_gb

131

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.14.18 PARAGRAMER activationThe Paragramer activation is described in detail in chapter 9.

7.15 Transformer configurationThis menu is used to specify between which external conductors the measuring voltage, which will be used by the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring as the regulating variable, is to be measured.

For more information on connecting the measuring transformer, see see “Socket connector 3; (Measuring voltage, auxiliary voltage)” on page 28.

The transformer ratios of the voltage and current transformers must be entered under the Knu/Kni menu item if the values on the undervoltage side of the transformer (voltage and current on the primary side of the measuring transformer) are to be measured.

��

Page 132: ba_reg_d_gb

132

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.15.1 Transformer configuration voltage (conductor connection)

It is not necessary to hardware-connect the voltage and current connections to specific positions in the network (e.g. U12 and L3, etc) in order to operate the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring. The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring will always measure the correct angle relationship regardless of between which external conductors the voltage is measured, and regardless of the line in which the current is measured, so long as the actual connection is transmitted to SETUP 5, transformer mounting.

NotePlease observe that when the control voltage is derived from a phase voltage (e.g. UL1-N) and the selected connector (UL1) has a high-resistance earth connection, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring will be offered a voltage which will cause the Relay to make tap-changes in the direction of a higher voltage.This condition must be particularly taken into consideration when operating a compensated network.

If the Relay is connected to an asymmetrically loaded network and correct measured values are still needed for both the active and the reactive power, the Relay may also be operated in the Aron circuit (feature M2).

In order to do so, both the parameterisation (transformer mounting, voltage and current set to “ARON”) and the connection must be carried out in the correct manner.

Please refer to the configuration documents for the connection assignment for currents l1 and l3 and for voltages L1, L2 and L3.

It is not sensible to give detailed information about the connecting the current and voltage supplies at this point since there is no fixed type of REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring.

Page 133: ba_reg_d_gb

133

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

The following is valid for the Aron circuit:

NoteOnly one three-phase voltage is used, even when the Relay is measuring in an Aron circuit.

REG-D

(A), (R), L1

(B), (S), L2

(C), (T), L3U V W

u v w

REG-D

(A), (R), L1

(B), (S), L2

(C), (T), L3U V W

u v w

Õ

Õ

��

Page 134: ba_reg_d_gb

134

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.15.2 Transformer mounting ratio for the voltage

The transformer mounting ratio (Knu) of the voltage transformer must be entered if the primary voltage value is to be displayed.

Example: 20 KV/100 V ➔ Knu = 200

7.15.3 Transformer mounting current (conductor connection)

Õ

Õ

��

Page 135: ba_reg_d_gb

135

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.15.4 Transformer mounting current (conversion 1 A / 5 A)

Caution!The jumper must be placed onto the correct part of terminal block 4 (NTZ 2) before changing the current range.

The contamination of the low voltage networks by harmonics also affects the medium voltage side and places more demands on the Relay’s measuring technology.

The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring input is equipped with a 4-pole blocking filter to prevent feedback effects (aliasing).

The switching of the Single Inline Filters (SILs)are switched from 1 A to 5 A using the jumper.

The jumpers will be placed in the appropriate positions before leaving the factory if the nominal value of the current is specified at the time of ordering.

If the nominal value of the current changes or is unknown at the time of ordering the hardware and software must be adjusted to each other. The software adjustment is described in section 7.15.4, and the hardware adjustment is illustrated in the following two diagrams.

��

Page 136: ba_reg_d_gb

136

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Please note that no jumper is required for a nominal current of 1 A. If the nominal current is 5 A, we recommended placing the jumper on only one pin.

The jumper must be placed at the position indicated above if the nominal current is 5 A.

The number of current transformers is controlled via feature M (M for “Messumformung” = transducer).

Feature M1 refers to a Relay with one voltage and one current transformer.

Current

173.5

Analogue module (Option)

AssignmentWith jumper Without jumper

Partial assignment for featur M1

Assignment for featur M2

Page 137: ba_reg_d_gb

137

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

In this case the Relay is equipped with only one SIL and is only suitable for measuring symmetrically loaded three-phase current networks.

Feature M2 refers to a Relay that is equipped with two voltage and two current transformers.

With this hardware configuration, the Relay can measure using an Aron circuit and can also be used in three-phase current networks loaded according to the requirements of the user.

Always ensure (also in the case of M2) that the control voltage is only measured at the connections that are associated with a feature M1 voltage converter (see also the information on page 133).

7.15.5 Transformer mounting ratio for the current

The transformer mounting ratio (Kni) of the current transformer must be entered if the primary current value is to be displayed.

Example: 1000 A/100 A ➔ Kni = 1000

��

Page 138: ba_reg_d_gb

138

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.16 Input assignments (binary inputs)

A specific function can be assigned to each input channel from the list of selection options.

Example:If the running time of the tap-changer is to be monitored, the “tap-change in operation lamp” must be connected to an input (e.g. to input E1, as is the case on delivery).

Select “TC in operation” using the arrow keys and confirm by pressing Return. The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring interprets the signal at E1 as a “tap-change in operation” signal and compares it to the “maximum time TC in operation” setting in Add-On 1. Also see chapter 7.17.

If the required function is missing, the input must be set to “Prog”. The input value can then be connected according to the respective requirements via the background program.

In this case it is worth looking through the Toolbox on our website (www.a-eberle.de) for similar applications or simply contact our headquarters.

��

Õ

Õ

��

Page 139: ba_reg_d_gb

139

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.17 Relay assignments

Relays Rel 3 ... Rel 5 are available to be freely programmed. Outputs Rel 6 ... Rel 9 are also freely programmable.

The assignment of relay positions Rel 6 to Rel 9 is controlled using feature “N”.

N0 ➔ No assignment

N1 ➔ Assignment with semi-conductor relay (50 V nominal insulation voltage)

N2 ➔ Assignment with relay (250 V)

If the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is equipped with a Local/Remote key (feature Y1), the assignment is always the same as that of feature N2 (there are at least 4 additional relays available).

��

Õ

Õ

Page 140: ba_reg_d_gb

140

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

A specific function can be assigned to each output from the list of selection options.

Example:If a message is to be sent when the running time of the tap-changer is exceeded, assign the function “TC-F” or “TC-F+” to a freely programmable relay.

If the tap-changer in operation voltage at input E1 is applied longer than was specified in “Add-On 1”, relay R3 will be activated which can function as an indicator or actuator (motor protection switch-off).

If the required function is missing, the output must be set to “Prog”. The relay can then be connected and activated according to the respective requirements via the background program.

In this case it is worth looking through the Toolbox on our website (www.a-eberle.de) for similar applications or simply contact our headquarters.

Page 141: ba_reg_d_gb

141

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

7.18 LED assignments

LEDs 1 ... 7 are available to be freely programmed.

��

Õ

Õ

� � � �� � � � � � � ��

� �

� �

� �

� � � �

� � � � � �

� � � � � � �

5671234

Status

LEDs

Page 142: ba_reg_d_gb

142

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

A specific display function may be assigned to each LED from the list of selection options.If the exceeded running time is to be signalled on LED 1, assign the function “TC-F” to the freely programmable LED 1.If the actual running time exceeds the specified running time, LED 1 will be activated.

If the required function is missing, the LED must be set to “Prog”. The input value can then be connected according to the respective requirements via the background program.

In this case it is worth looking through the Toolbox on our website (www.a-eberle.de) for similar applications or simply contact our headquarters.

Page 143: ba_reg_d_gb

143

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

8 Measurement Value Simulation

In order to avoid the simulator being switched on accidentally, some steps are required to guarantee that the simulated voltage is only applied when it is specifically desired.

The required steps are:

1 Start WinREG

2 Load the terminal.

3 After pressing Enter, the device will respond by giving the respective address, e.g. <A>.

4 In step 4 you can choose between the following options:

a) Characteristic simmode=1(enter it like this using the terminal!) starts up the simulator, which must additionally be selected via SETUP 6, F5.In this mode, the simulator can only operate in the MANUAL operation mode.Switching from MANUAL to AUTOMATIC switches off the simulator.

b) Characteristic simmode=2(enter it like this using the terminal!) starts up the simulator, which must additionally be selected via SETUP 6, F5.In this mode, the simulator can also operate in the AUTOMATIC operation mode.Switching from MANUAL to AUTOMATIC does not switch off the simulator, but it does automatically change back 15 minutes after the keyboard was last used.

c) Characteristic simmode=0(enter it like this using the terminal!) switches off the simulator. The simulator can no longer be switched on in SETUP 6, F5.

The simulator mode (simmode=1) is activated as factory default, which only permits simulator operation in the MANUAL operation mode. (simmode=1)

Page 144: ba_reg_d_gb

144

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

NoteIf the term “Actual Value” is displayed in capital letters as “ACTUAL VALUE”, the “MEASUREMENT VALUE SIMULATION” is active!

The simulator for the quantities U, I, and ϕ can be activated in the SETUP 6/STATUS menu.

Caution!The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring will automatically switch back from the “MEASUREMENT VALUE SIMULATION” to normal regulation 15 min. after the keyboard was last used!

NoteIf the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is operated together with the PAN-D voltage monitoring unit (connected via E-LAN), it should be observed that in simulation mode the simulated voltage will also be fed to the PAN-D. During simulation, the PAN-D only sees the simulated input voltage and not the real voltage of the system.

Õ

Õ

��

��

Page 145: ba_reg_d_gb

145

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

8.1 Setting the simulated voltageWhen the simulator is turned on (simmode=1 or simmode = 2), the voltage can be simulated in regulator, transducer and

recorder mode using the two arrow keys and .

The phase angle and the current can only be simulated in transducer mode.

➪ Select “F2” “TRANSDUCER MODE”

➪ The right arrow key raises the simulated voltage in 0.5 V increments (when Knu=1).

➪ The left arrow key lowers the simulated voltage in 0.5 V increments (when Knu=1).

8.2 Setting the simulated current

➪ Select “F2” “TRANSDUCER MODE”

➪ ”F2” increases the simulated current incrementally.

➪ “F3” decreases the simulated current incrementally.

8.3 Setting the simulated phase angle

➪ Select “F2” “TRANSDUCER MODE”

➪ ”F4” increases the simulated currentin increments of 1.0 °.

➪ ”F5” increases the simulated currentin increments of 1.0 °.

��

��

��

Page 146: ba_reg_d_gb

146

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

8.4 Setting the simulated tap-changeThe tap-change voltage can be simulated when the simulator is switched on (simmode=1 or simmode = 2).

Start the simulated tap-change by pressing “F4” .

The simulated tap-change is indicated by “++” after the word “measurement simulation”.

++ ➔ Tap-change simulation is turned on

NoteThe simulated tap-change position can only be changed if the Relay is set to the “MANUAL OPERATION MODE” .

➪ “Arrow key raise” increases the simulated tap-changer position by 1 increment.

➪ “Arrow key lower” reduces the simulated tap change by 1 increment.

��

��

Page 147: ba_reg_d_gb

147

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

9 Parallel Operation of Transformers with REG-D™

Parallel switching of several transformers must be prepared in advance. In general, the taps must first be adjusted to each other and the circuit breakers and disconnectors have to be put in the corresponding position. Then, all of the Relays switched in parallel must be informed of these switching statuses.

The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is provided with a program section which is capable of recognizing the switching statuses of the individual transformers and can automatically group the transformers according to these switching statuses so that only those Relays feeding on one joint busbar work in parallel.

It is, of course, also possible to work in the standard way in which the parallel-switching operation is manually activated.

Both procedures require specific preparations to be carried out on the device in advance. The preparations to be carried out are described in the following sections:

➪ Preparing manual activation

➪ Preparing automatic activation

The regulation conditions should be set before choosing the regulating procedure.

Are the transformers of the same or of a different type? Is it possible to connect the individual Relays with each other via E-LAN, or is the distance between each feeding point too large making connection impossible?

Should the transformers be regulated so that they all have the same tap-changer position or should the reactive circulating current be minimised?

Please select the appropriate procedure from the list below according to the answers to these questions:

Page 148: ba_reg_d_gb

148

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

All the listed regulating procedures are available in the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring as standard.

Master-Slave

Master-Slave independent (MSI)

ΔI sinϕ (minimisation of the reactive circulating current)

ΔI sinϕ (S) (minimisation of the reactive circulating current, taking into consideration the nominal powers of the transformers)

Δ cosϕ

The Δ cosϕ operation is an available regulation procedure which is always used if the Relays which are switched in parallel cannot be connected to each other via the bus (E-LAN).

If a bus error occurs during parallel operation according to the reactive circulating current minimisation procedure (ΔI sin ϕ or ΔI sin ϕ (S)), the complete combination switches to an emergency regulation which also works according to the Δcos ϕ procedure.

If a malfunction occurs, each Relay uses the last measured cos ϕ and attempts to both maintain the voltage within the regulative deviation (bandwidth) and to approach the last measured cosϕ as closely as possible.

Operation mode

Transformer boundary conditions Pre-requisites regarding the Relay

REG-DTM

REG-DAPrograms

Voltagechange per tap-change

Nominalpower

Deviationof the relative short circuit

voltages

Maximum tap-change

difference when in operation

Currentmeasurement

available

Tap-changing possible

Bus connectionavailable

Paralleloperation

on thebusbar

no changeno change or various

≤ 10 % none possible required requiredMaster

Slave/MSI

no change or various

no change ≤ 10 % parameterisable required possible required ΔIsinϕ

no change or various

various ≤ 10 % parameterisable required possible required ΔIsinϕ (S)

Paralleloperation on a

network

no change or various

no change or various

no change or various

parameterisable required possible possible Δcosϕ

Page 149: ba_reg_d_gb

149

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

9.1 Connection diagram

*se

e ne

xt p

age

REG-

DRE

G-D

Page 150: ba_reg_d_gb

150

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

The circuit diagram shows the parallel switching of two transformers with the most important connections. The principle is the same for three transformers and more.

Please observe that the voltage and current transformers do not have to be connected in the shown manner. Every possible type of connection of the individual conductors is possible. However, it is important to ensure that the transformer configuration or switching status for carrying out measurements has been entered in SETUP 5, F2.

* Please observe the contact load at R1 and R2!

110 V DC 230 V AC20 A Switch on 5 A @ cosϕ = 1

5 A Hold 3 A @ cosϕ = 0.4

0.4 A Switch off

Page 151: ba_reg_d_gb

151

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

9.2 Programs for parallel operation and their prerequisites

Caution!Please note without fail that only REG-D Relays for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring with the same firmware version can be operated in parallel.Otherwise errors can occur during operation.The current firmware version can be displayed using the Relay’s keypad. Please press the menu key until you havereached SETUP 6. The Relay status page can be selected using F5.The firmware version is displayed in the first two lines, e.g. V2.01 on 01.02.04.

If different versions are installed, please download the current firmware version from our website (www.a-eberle.de or www.regsys.de) or telephone us.

9.2.1 PreparationThe following description defines both the preparations to be carried out for manual activation as well as those necessary for automatic activation of parallel switching.

For demonstrating each individual operating step, a system has been selected which consists of three transformers feeding on one busbar.

The master-slave procedure has been chosen as the parallel program.

If another program with a different number of transformers is selected, please adapt each operating step correspondingly.

In order to permit the master to check at any time whether the slaves are working correctly, it is necessary that each Relay is supplied with the tap-change position of “its” transformer and that the bus connection (E-LAN) is activated between all the Relays.

Preparing manual activation“Preparing manual activation” refers to the sequence of consecutive switching operations which prepare for the parallel operation of several transformers (adjusting the tap-change

Page 152: ba_reg_d_gb

152

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

position, adding circuit breakers, disconnectors and couplings) as well as the actual manual activation of the parallel regulation.

In this case parallel regulation can be activated via the menu (SETUP 5, Add-On 6) or via a binary input signal.

Preparing for automatic activation“Preparing automatic activation” refers to the simultaneous and automatic activation of the parallel operation of several transformers as a function of the logical position (off/on) of all of the circuit breakers, disconnectors and couplings.

This type of preparation can be carried out by feeding a busbar replica (positions of the circuit breakers, disconnectors, bus ties and bus couplings) to each one of the Relays involved in the regulation.

On the basis of the switching statuses, the regulation system can automatically recognise which transformer is supposed to work with which other transformer(s) on one busbar in parallel operation.

The transformers are then regulated according to the selected regulating procedure.

Page 153: ba_reg_d_gb

153

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

9.2.2 Preparing manual activationThe following steps are required to set up the parallel-switching of 3 transformers according to the master-slave procedure.

If two transformers or even four transformers are required, please adapt the procedure correspondingly.

NoteIn this chapter parameterisation will be carried out using the membrane keypad of the Relay.Of course, the individual operation steps may also be performed using the WinREG parameterisation software.

Step 1Switch all Relays to the MANUAL mode.

Step 2Assign station identification.

The Relay assigned to transformer 1 is given the station code (address) <A>, the Relay assigned to transformer 2 is given the station code (address) <B>, and the Relay assigned to transformer 3 is given the station code <C>.

Code input:

Select SETUP 6, F1, F2.

This address may be incremented using the F1 and F2 keys or decremented using the F4 and F5 keys.

Confirm your selection using <Enter>.

A to Z4

Page 154: ba_reg_d_gb

154

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Each address in the range A ... Z4 is permitted, however each station code may only be assigned once.

If the PAN-D voltage monitoring unit is assigned to a Relay, the Relay will automatically assign a code to its corresponding PAN-D.

To assign this address, the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring increments its own address (by one!) and assigns it to the PAN-D.

Example:

If the Relay has the code <A>, it will assign the code <A1> to the PAN-D. If the Relay has the code <B9>, it will assign the code <C> to the PAN-D.

Step 3Establish the connection to the bus.

To start the parallel operation, all participating Relays must be able to communicate with each other via E-LAN.

This requires that the bus link (2-conductor or 4-conductor bus) is connected in the line-to-line or standard bus structure.

Once the hardware prerequisites are fulfilled, the bus link must be parameterised [see “E-LAN (Energy-Local Area Network)” on page 96].

Step 4Parallel program selection

Select SETUP 1, F5.

��

Page 155: ba_reg_d_gb

155

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

After pressing the F2 key, select the master-slave regulation procedure.

This setting is only required for the master − which usually has the address <A> − because all of the other stations will automatically be declared as slaves when the group list is input (see Step 5).

Slaves are to be assigned the parallel program “none''.

Step 5Input the group list

The codes of all of the Relays participating in the parallel operation are listed in the group list.

Select SETUP 1, F5, F1, F5

Please press F1, F2 and F3 to parameterise the Relays in the first, second and third positions with the codes <A>, <B> and <C> respectively.

If the group list can be entered in the manner described, then as a rule it can generally be guaranteed that the bus link will work properly.

Õ

Õ

��

Page 156: ba_reg_d_gb

156

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

It is not necessary to input a regulative influence for the selected procedure.

Step 6Parallel switching activation

There are several different ways to activate the parallel-switching operation:

➪ Activation via the keypad

➪ Activation via the binary input (level-controlled)

➪ Activation via binary input (pulse-controlled)

➪ Activation via IEC ..., RS 232, ...

Activation via the keypadPlease select SETUP 5, F1, Add-On 6

Pressing down the F2 function key activates the parallel-switching operation.

Select “ON”.

The parallel-switching operation is active in automatic mode as long as the “parallel program activation” is “ON”.

If you prefer to activate the parallel-switching operation via a binary input instead of via the menu, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring offers two options:

The parallel-switching operation can either be level-controlled or activated via a level-controlled input.

Õ

Õ

Page 157: ba_reg_d_gb

157

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

“Level-controlled activation” means that the parallel-switching operation is activated as long as the potential is at the selected input. It will be switched off as soon as the potential at the selected input drops off.

In “pulse-controlled” activation, the parallel-switching operation is switched on by the first pulse. The next pulse switches it off and so on.

If the parallel-switching operation is to be deactivated using a binary input, please carry out the following procedure:

Select the trigger input.

All freely programmable inputs with the exception of E5 and E6 may be used as the trigger or release input.

The following example demonstrates how to activate the parallel-switching operation via input E7.

Select SETUP 5, F3, F1

Press the F4 key and then select the “Par Prog” function in the framed field in the middle of the display.

Accept the setting by pressing <Enter>.

The parallel-switching operation can now be activated via binary input E7.

Õ

Õ

��

Page 158: ba_reg_d_gb

158

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

For an optical signal that the parallel-switching operation has been activated, please select SETUP5, F5.

In the following example, the status “parallel switching activated” is to be indicated using the freely programmable LED 4.

Press the F5 key and select the “Par Prog” function in the framed field in the middle of the display.

Accept the setting for LED 4 by pressing <Enter>.

If the status of the parallel-switching operation (ON/OFF) is to be reported via a potential-free contact, please select a free relay (R3, R4, R5, ...) in SETUP 5 using the F4 key and assign the Par-Prog function to it.

��

Õ

Õ

��

Page 159: ba_reg_d_gb

159

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

If the parallel-switching operation is to be activated or deactivated via level-controlled or pulse-controlled inputs, please select the preferred activation method (level or pulse) in SETUP 5, F1, Add-On 6 using the F2 key.

Step 7

Switch the circuit breakers, bus ties, bus couplings and disconnectors according to the planned parallel-switching operation.

Step 8

Switch all of the Relays to the AUTO mode.

The master first sets all of the slaves to its actual tap-changer position in order to start the voltage regulation.

In normal operation, the voltage is held within the permissible regulative deviation (bandwidth) and all transformers involved are regulated to the same tap-changer position.

Page 160: ba_reg_d_gb

160

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

9.2.3 Preparing automatic activationThe PARAGRAMER can be loaded from the start menu as a tool for preparing the automatic activation and for visualising the switching status on-line.

The artificial word PARAGRAMER is derived from the terms parallel and one-line diagram.

The PARAGRAMER displays the switching status of the individual transformers in a one-line diagram and can be loaded from the start menu using the F5 key, provided that the PARAGRAMER feature has been activated.

Normally up to six transformers can be operated using the PARAGRAMER.In a special version, however, up to 10 transformers can be connected.

The function is activated by feeding a complete busbar replica (circuit breakers, disconnectors, bus ties and bus couplings) of “its” transformer into each Relay.The regulation system can automatically recognise which transformer is to work with which other transformer(s) on a busbar in parallel operation on the basis of the switching statuses.

The system treats busbars connected via bus couplings as one single busbar.

The standard PARAGRAMER version can display the following configurations

➪ 2 transformers with one busbar(1 circuit breaker per transformer)

Note

= Switching element

= Switching element

open

closed

Page 161: ba_reg_d_gb

161

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

➪ 3 transformers with one busbar(1 circuit breaker per transformer)

➪ 2 transformers with two busbars(1 circuit breaker and 2 disconnectors per transformer)

➪ 3 transformers with two busbars(1 circuit breaker and 2 disconnectors per transformer)

Page 162: ba_reg_d_gb

162

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Busbars “1” and “2” can additionally be disconnected or coupled by means of bus ties or bus couplings.

The logical status of the couplings may also be fed to the Relay and is included in the assignment algorithm (who with whom?).

The following abbreviations have been selected to clearly characterise each individual switch, disconnector, etc.:

The prefix PG stands for PARAGRAMER. All of the other abbreviated terms are listed below:

❑ PG_LS:Circuit breaker return signal (German: Leistungsschalter) of the corresponding transformer

❑ PG_TRa:Disconnector return signal (German: Trenner) of the corresponding transformer to busbar 1

❑ PG_TRb:Disconnector return signal (German: Trenner) of the corresponding transformer to busbar 2

❑ PG_QK:Bus coupling return signal (German: Querkupplung) of the corresponding transformer

❑ PG_LK1:Bus tie return signal right (German: Längskupplung rechts) of the corresponding transformer in busbar 1

❑ PG_LK2:Bus tie return signal right (German: Längskupplung rechts) of the corresponding transformer in busbar 2

Page 163: ba_reg_d_gb

163

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Step 1

Switch all Relays to the MANUAL mode.

Step 2

Activate the PARAGRAMER.

Please select SETUP 5, F1, Add-On 6, F5 and activate the PARAGRAMER by selecting the number of parallel-operating transformers.For three parallel-operating transformers select: ON-3

Step 3

Assign station identification.

The Relay assigned to transformer 1 is given the station code (address) <A>, the Relay assigned to transformer 2 is given the station code (address) <B>, and the Relay assigned to transformer 3 is given the station code <C>.

Code input:

Select SETUP 6, F1, F2.

��

A to Z4

Page 164: ba_reg_d_gb

164

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

This address may be incremented using the F1 and F2 keys or decremented using the F4 and F5 keys.

Confirm your selection using <Enter>.

Each address in the range A ... Z4 is permitted, however each station code may only be assigned once.

If the PAN-D voltage monitoring unit is assigned to a Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring, the Relay will automatically assign a code to its corresponding PAN-D.

To assign this address, the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring increments its own address (by one!) and assigns it to the PAN-D.

Example: If the regulator has the code <A>, it will assign the code <A1> to the PAN-D. If the Relay has the code <B5>, it will assign the code <B6> to the PAN-D.

Step 4

Establish the connection to the bus.

To start the parallel operation, all parallel-operating Relays must be able to communicate with each other via E-LAN.

This requires that the bus link (2-conductor or 4-conductor bus) is connected in the line-to-line or standard bus structure.

The bus link must be parameterised [see “E-LAN (Energy-Local Area Network)” on page 96] once the hardware prerequisites are fulfilled.

Step 5

Parameterisation of the group list.

The number of participating parallel-operating transformers (n=3) is specified by inputting the group list.

The group list is numbered consecutively and each Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring must be

Page 165: ba_reg_d_gb

165

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

parameterised in the same order. The Relay of the first transformer must be first in the group list, the Relay of the second transformer second in the group list, etc. The Relay ID may be freely selected as described above. For clarity, however, the first Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring should be assigned code A:, Relay 2 code B:, etc.

The group list also specifies the number of transformers shown in the PARAGRAMER mode (second position in the group list occupied => 2 transformers, third position occupied => 3 transformers, etc.).

The group list also indicates which Relays are presently working together:

Three symbols (+,*,=), which appear before the group list entry have been introduced to characterise the parallel-operating transformers. Relays with the same symbol are presently feeding on one busbar.

The following procedure should be carried out for each Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring:

Setup 1, =>

<F5> “Programs”, =>

<F1> “Par. Parameters”, =>

<F5> “E-LAN group list”, => Enter the stations

Step 6

Parallel program selection

Select SETUP 1, F5.

��

Page 166: ba_reg_d_gb

166

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

After pressing the F2 key, select the master-slave regulation procedure.

This setting is only required for the master − which usually has the address <A> − because all of the other stations will automatically be declared as slaves when the group list is input.

Slaves should be assigned the parallel program “none''.

Step 7

Input assignments

The individual programmable binary Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring inputs are prepared for their respective tasks in this step.

If, for instance, the disconnector PG_TR1 of transformer 1 is to be assigned to the Relay input E8, the function PG_TR1 must be assigned to input E 8 using menu SETUP 5, F3 “Input assignments...” and the function keys.

This same procedure applies for all of the other inputs/signals as well.

Õ

Õ

Page 167: ba_reg_d_gb

167

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Depending on the input assignment, the display can show one or two busbars.

The following input functions are available:

➪ PG_LS:Circuit breaker return signal of the corresponding transformer

➪ PG_TR1:Disconnector return signal of the corresponding transformer on busbar 1

➪ PG_TR2:Disconnector return signal of the corresponding transformer on busbar 2

➪ PG_QK:Bus coupling

➪ PG_LK1:Bus tie to the right of the infeed onbusbar 1

➪ PG_LK2:Bus tie to the right of the infeed onbusbar 2

Inputs which are not in use are assigned a default setting. This makes it possible to also display system diagrams which do not correspond to the maximum possible configuration with one circuit breaker, two disconnectors, one bus coupling and two bus ties per transformer.

NoteA solution is also available for applications in which the busbars are coupled crosswise.The “crosslink” feature makes it easy to master this task. This type of busbar arrangement is not described here since it is not used very frequently. If it is required, please contact our headquarters. This option is already available on your Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring and can be activated at any time using the Firmware feature.

Page 168: ba_reg_d_gb

168

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Summary of the default settings:

❑ 1 busbar:

PG_LS: open

PG_TR1: closed, however not displayed in thePARAGRAMER

❑ 2 busbars:

PG_LS: closed

PG_TR1: open

PG_TR2: open

PG_QK: open

PG_LK1: closed

PG_LK2: closed

The displays to be shown are changed according to the criteria listed below:

➪ If the Relay in the third position in the group list is assigned a freely selected PG_xxx parameter, three transformers will be displayed in a circuit diagram instead of two.

➪ If either PG_TR1 or PG_TR2 is used on a Relay entered in the group, two busbars will be displayed in a circuit diagram instead of one.

➪ If either PG_QK, PG_LK1 or PG_LK2 is used on a Relay entered in the group, the bus ties and bus couplings will be activated in the display.

Page 169: ba_reg_d_gb

169

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Step 8

Displaying the busbar replica

Depending on the parameterised group list, the overview screen will display two to six Relays. In addition to the PARAGRAMER overview, it is also possible to select a detailed display.

Selection summary:

<MENU>, <F5> => PARAGRAMER summary

Selecting the switching status:

Use <F5> to switch switching status/overview.

Use “<” and “>” to scroll in the Switching status view.

9. Step

Switch all of the Relays to the AUTO operation mode.

The parallel-switching operation can now be activated automatically.

Page 170: ba_reg_d_gb

170

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

9.3 Parallel operation using the “Master-Slave-Independent (MSI)” procedure

(available as of Version 2.03 from the 16th July 2004)

NoteAll of the control technology information about TapErr and ParErr also applies to the master-slave operation carried out according to any activation procedure.

MSI stands for Master (M), Slave (S) and Independent (I) operation of individual transformers.

In this operation mode, all of the participating parallel-switching transformers are placed by the operator in one of the states described above.

Transformers then always work according to the principle of equalising the tap-changer positions, which is also called the master-slave procedure.

NoteThe terms master-follower and master-slave are used synonymously is everyday language and that is also the case in the following text.

Please note:

➪ In the MSI mode, it is only possible to change the operation mode (MSI) of the Relay when in the manual mode.

➪ In the independent mode, on the other hand, each Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can be switched back and forth from MANUAL to AUTO at any time.

➪ When the transformers are already operating in parallel, it is possible to switch from the AUTO mode to the MANUAL mode by switching any Relay to the MANUAL mode.This therefore ensures that the entire group can quickly be switched to the MANUAL mode in the event of a fault.

➪ In the Auto mode, the group can only then be switched if the master is switched to the AUTO mode; the slaves will not accept being switched from MANUAL to AUTO.

➪ The status line of the paragramer display indicates which Relay is currently functioning as the master.

Page 171: ba_reg_d_gb

171

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

It is also possible to indicate the operating status using an LED.

If the parameter MSI-Ma is assigned to a particular LED, it lights up when the Relay is operating in master mode. The same procedure can also be carried out for slave operation (parameter = MSI_Sl) or independent operation (parameter = MSI_Ind).

The parameterisation is also displayed in the ParaGramer and the individual transformers are designated by the letters M, S and I.

All of the transformers/Relays working as either a master or a slave are displayed with a closed coupling. On the other hand, Relays working in the independent mode (currently feeding on a different busbar or in the stand-by mode) are displayed with an open coupling.

If more than one Relay has been mistakenly assigned to the master mode, the MSI algorithm will treat the Relay with the lowest address (A is lower than B or C!) as the “master” and will treat all of the other Relays mistakenly defined as being masters as slaves.

The ParaGramer display will also show the present status of the parallel operation in the status line in the form of the measured voltage, the calculated regulative deviation and the tap-changer position in addition to the “Who with whom?” information

This makes it possible to obtain all of the information needed to evaluate the parallel operation.

Page 172: ba_reg_d_gb

172

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Conditions for MSI operationThe MSI operation mode can only be applied when the PARAGRAMER feature is activated and turned on.

Relays which are delivered with the K1 feature (with parallel operation) are already parameterised in this way by default.

The Paragramer is switched on by selecting SETUP 5, Add-On 6.

Press F5 to specify the number of transformers to be switched in parallel.

Example: The ParaGramer must be set to ON-3 for a group of three transformers.

The MSI operation mode can be selected by choosing the MSI operation mode in SETUP 1, Programs..., Parallel Program.

Caution!The MSI operation mode must be selected for each Relay involved in the parallel-switching operation.

We advise contacting our company headquarters if the K1 feature and, therefore, also the Paragramer, are to be enabled at a later date.

To verify the present settings, please selectSETUP 6, F5 (Status), --> Page 2 of the device status.

NoteSeveral features, e.g. RECORDER, TMM 01 can, of course, be loaded at the same time.

Page 173: ba_reg_d_gb

173

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Further prerequisites for using the MSI procedure:Only transformer types with identical electrical (output, short circuit voltage, voltage between the tap-changer positions, switching groups, etc.) and mechanical features (number of tap-changer positions, position of the deadband) are suitable for MSI operation.

A different procedure should be used if one or more of the parameters differ.

In addition, it must be ensured that each Relay receives the information regarding the tap-changer position of “its” transformer.

For operation using the master-slave tap-change equalisation procedure, it is mandatory that the correct tap-changer position is recorded and transmitted to the respective Relays.

Every potential “candidate” must be listed in the group list with its address in order to notify the system of the number of Relays/transformers that should take part in the parallel operation.

Please select the sub-menu “Parallel Parameters” inSETUP 1.

Method: SETUP 1 / Programs... (F5) / “Par. Parameters” (F1)

The group list must be entered in the “Par. parameters” menu.

In the first group position, please select the Relay with the lowest address by pressing the F1 key. Then place the Relay with the next highest address in the second position in the list.

Continue in the same manner for all of the Relays currently involved in the parallel-switching operation as well as for those that will be later in the parallel switching operation later.

Page 174: ba_reg_d_gb

174

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Selecting the operation modesThree different methods can be used to select operation modes.

1. via the binary input

2. via the membrane keypad (F3 … F5)

3. via the (serial) control system

Method 1:Select three free inputs per Relay and assign the Master (MSI_Ma), Slave (MSI_Sl) or Independent (MSI_Ind) functions to them using SETUP 5, F3 or by using WinREG.

Example:IT should be possible to select the operation mode using inputs E9 to E11.

The following is displayed in SETUP 5, F3:

A signal transmitted to input E-9 will cause the Relay to work as the master.

The present status is indicated by an X in the square brackets.

The results of this parameterisation:

Page 175: ba_reg_d_gb

175

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

This status is indicated on both the regulator display as well as on the ParaGramer.

Page 176: ba_reg_d_gb

176

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Method 2:Selection via the membrane keypad is only possible in the ParaGramer.

For this reason it is necessary to first return to the main menu.

Then press the F5 key to select the ParaGramer display mode.

The symbol in the status line has been assigned to the F1 key.

Press F1 and select the desired operation mode using F3, F4 and F5.

Information regarding effective manoeuvring on the screen can be found under “i” by pressing the F2 key.

NoteThe mode cannot be overwrittten via the keypad if a specific mode is pre-selected via the binary input and a signal is present at the input.The mode that was most recently assigned an input is always pre-selected. Since the inputs are triggered via the edge of the input signal, one short impulse is sufficient to select the operation mode.

Page 177: ba_reg_d_gb

177

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Method 3:Selection of the individual Relays is carried out via a serial interface (IEC…, DNP 3.0, MODBUS, SPA-Bus; via LWL or copper).

A further prerequisite for fault-free operation is that all of the Relays have the same parameterisation.

For this reason, different parameters must be set in SETUPs 1 and 5.

Since the slaves in the master-slaves procedure are only allowed a limited freedom of action, changes in the parameters can only be carried out in the independent mode or the master mode.

For this reason, the parameterisation should already have been completed in SETUP 5 before commencing work in SETUP 1.

Please note:First SETUP 5, then SETUP 1

Select SETUP 5, F1…, (Add-On 6).

The following parameters can be entered:

Explanations of the individual menu items:“Parallel Prog. activation” must be set to ON to activate parallel operation.

Page 178: ba_reg_d_gb

178

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

The indication “1st ParErr after n tap-changer in operation time” can be interpreted as follows.

If a parallel-switching operation with n stations has just occurred, the system assumes that all of the participating transformers will have the same tap-changer position within 1.5 x the tap-changer in operation time.

If there is an error in the transmission of the BCD code or if there are problems regarding the equalisation of the tap-changer positions, a tap-changer position error (TapErr) will be detected which causes the system to stop.

However, if a transformer, which (for example) has been feeding another busbar or has been working in the stand-by mode, is selected to participate in the parallel-switching operation, this parameter can be used to specify the number of tap-changes it may deviate from the parallel transformers that are already running. This transformer is then brought to the same tap-changer position as the transformers which are already operating in parallel, one step at a time and without interrupting regulation.

If equalisation doesn’t occur within the pre-selected time, the parallel-switching is stopped and all participating Relays switch to MANUAL mode.

Example:The transformer/Relay <D> to be added to the parallel-switching operation is currently set to the resting position in tap-changer position 4.

The group switched in parallel is currently working in tap-changer position 8 and the motor running time between two tap-changer positions is 7 seconds.

If you want to add transformer <D> to the parallel-switched group − without considering the resulting circulating reactive currents − the “1st ParErr after n·tap-changer in operation time” parameter must be set to 4.

The monitoring algorithm of the parallel program will wait an interval of 4 times the tap-changer in operation time of the added transformer (4 x 7 seconds = 28 seconds) before a parallel error (ParErr) is triggered.

Under normal conditions, the new station can be “brought” to the tap-changer position of the group within this specified interval.

Page 179: ba_reg_d_gb

179

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

If this is not possible, the error flag ParErr will be set and the entire group will be switched to the MANUAL mode.

The MANUAL operation mode is the fail-safe position for all of the master-slave procedures.

The group can only be switched back to the AUTO mode via the master after the error which triggered the ParErr has been rectified.

The number of transformers/Relays involved in the parallel-switching operation can be selected with the help of the “ParaGramer Activity” parameter.

Example:If three transformers/Relays are to be switched in parallel,

“Paragramer Activity” 3

must be selected by pressing F5.

Settings in SETUP 1Several settings must be carried out in Setup 1.

Under normal conditions − all of the transformers are the same − the settings for the “permissible regulative deviation” (F1), the “time factor” (F2) and the “setpoint value” (F3) should all be the same.

However, if you prefer to have different setpoint values activated when changing masters, different setpoint values can also be specified.

However, during the parallel-switching operation, only the setpoint value parameterised in the currently active master is taken into consideration.

Different setpoint values can naturally also be selected even if the setpoint values originally had the same parameterisation. To do this, the setpoint value of the active master is changed via the binary input, the program or the serial interface.

Page 180: ba_reg_d_gb

180

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Select SETUP 1, F5 (Programs).

Select the parallel program “MSI” using the F2 key.

All of the preparations necessary for the parallel-switching operation have now been carried out. Proceed in the MANUAL mode by changing the transformers until the voltage is outside of the tolerance band. Then switch to AUTO mode to verify whether the parallel-switching operation is functioning properly.

It is only functioning properly if the voltage returns to the tolerance band within a short period of time and all of the transformers are set to the same tap-changer position.

We recommend carrying out this test for both positive and negative regulative deviations.

Page 181: ba_reg_d_gb

181

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

9.3.1 Trouble-shootingParallel-switching operations carried out according to the master-slave procedure can only function properly, if − in addition to the correct functioning of the participating Relays − the infrastructure (recording and signalling of the tap-changer position, bus connection) are also functioning fault-free.

To ensure that errors that could occur outside of the Relays do not cause problems for maintaining the voltage, the two error flags ParErr and TapErr have been introduced to monitor the recording of the tap-changer position and the bus connection respectively.

9.3.1.1 Description of the ParErr and TapErr error flags A fault in the parallel-switching operation is signalled through the ParErr and TapErr error bits.

ParErrParrErr stands for a faulty parallel operation in general (parallel error) and automatically switches a group of transformers operating in parallel from the AUTOMATIC operation mode to the MANUAL operation mode. If a different behaviour is desired, this can be specified through an alteration to the SYSCTR feature. In this case please contact our headquarters.

ParErr is triggered, for example, when the Relay is bypassed when a tap-changer regulation is carried out (the tap-changer position is set directly at the motor drive or via the “remote control bypass”) and the transformers are not all set back to the same tap-changer position within an interval that is 1.5 times the tap-change in operation time.

Exception: If a transformer with a specific tap difference is added to the parallel-switching operation (independent becomes slave), ParErr is not triggered until the interval specified inSETUP 5, Add-On 6, “1st ParErr after n·tap-changer in operation time” has been exceeded.

Page 182: ba_reg_d_gb

182

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

TapErrTapErr is a signal that indicates a problem with the tap-changer position. The name is derived from the term “tap error”.

Like ParErr, TapErr affects the entire group when in MSI operation mode.

If a transformer is being switched in parallel, regulation will stop after 1.5 x the tap-changer in operation time if the tap-changer positions have not reached the same level within this time.

We recommend individually assigning the TapErr and ParErr error bits to an LED and/or a relay to inform the operating personnel about the status of the parallel regulation and to thus make it easier to rectify the error.

The following are considered to be tap errors:1. Tap-changes in the wrong direction

Example:The Relay outputs a “raise” command and the transformer reacts with a lower tap-change or the Relay outputs a “lower” command and the transformer reacts with a higher tap-change.

Possible causes of the error: The raise and lower signals have been swapped or the motor drive is behaving inversely.

Inverse behaviour implies that the Relay increases the transformer ratio in the event of a higher tap-change, thus lowering the voltage.

In most cases, it is expected that an increase in the tap-changer position results in a higher voltage, and a decrease in the tap-changer position results in a lower voltage.

Remedy: Exchange the raise and lower signals

Page 183: ba_reg_d_gb

183

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

2. No tap-change

Example:The Relay outputs a command, but the tap-changer position does not change.

In this case, it must be assumed that either the position confirmation signal or the motor drive is defective.

3. Illogical tap-changes

If no signal is received from the next higher or next lower tap position after a raise or lower command is issued, the Relay interprets this as a fault in the tap-change operation and the TapErr flag is set.

As mentioned above, we recommend assigning the TapErr error bit to an LED and/or a relay to inform the operating personnel about the status of the parallel regulation and to thus make it easier to rectify any error.

Tap limitationIf the tap is to be limited from either above or below, please enter the following background program lines via the WinREG terminal program:

H 7=‘RegStufe-,Lower tap limitation,<=,if,RegSperreT =3,else,RegSperreT =0’

H 8=‘RegStufe-,Upper tap limitation,>=,if,RegSperreH =3,else,RegSperreH =0’

In place of the “Upper tap limitation”, enter the required upper tap limitation for your requirements and in place of the “Lower tap limitation” enter the required lower tap limitation.

NoteThe assignment of program lines H7 and H8 is arbitrary, and you can use any two program lines of your choice.

Page 184: ba_reg_d_gb

184

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

10 Resistance Measuring Equipment for Tap-Changers with Resistance-Coded Tap-Change Signalling

Resistance inputIf the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is equipped with a “tap-change potentiomenter” resistance input, the tap-changer resistance network can be connected directly and interpreted as a tap-change by the Relay.

This eliminates the complication of using an external resistance measurement transducer.

The resistance chain receives a constant current from the Relay via two terminals (see design specification).

The voltage drop that occurs with the tap-change level is measured using two further terminals (see design specification).

The Relay is normally connected in a 3-conductor circuit. Please contact our company headquarters if a 4-conductor circuit is required.

The resistance measurement equipment consists of a programmable current source to feed the measurement resistor, and a voltage measurement device to measure the voltage at the resistor. Tap-change resistances between 1 Ω and 400 Ω can be measured. However, the total resistance must remain ≤ 20 kΩ

The measurement result is output with a 12 bit resolution at a refresh rate of approx. 10 Hz (0.1 s).

The measurement equipment also contains a broken wire detection system.

The parameters are input in an application menu using the keypad.

Loading the application menuThe application menu appears when the enter key is pressed in one of the main menus (regulator measurement transducer, recorder etc.).

The system also branches off into the application menu if the enter key is pressed when in SETUP 1 to 6.

Page 185: ba_reg_d_gb

185

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Meaning of the lines in the menu

1st Line: dR is the nominal resistance between two levels

2nd Line: is the highest measurable level

3rd Line: is the lowest measurable level

10.1 Error detectionThe error detection recognises the following errors:

➪ Interruption in the current loop

➪ Overloading of the current source

➪ Interruption of one or both of the feeder cables for the voltage measurement input

➪ Measurement input overloaded

➪ Measurement range overshot

The resistance measurement value will be > RMAX for all detectable faults.

Therefore RMAX should be measured so that the value is never exceeded under normal conditions.

If an error occurs, an Infobox will be shown, which indicates the error and the current measured resistance value.

10.2 Level detectionThe level resistance value RS is a required input value.

The internal level N is calculated from the measured resistance value RM using

and displayed.

Page 186: ba_reg_d_gb

186

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

The present measurement resistance value and the deviation, ΔRn, of the present measurement resistance value from the present level N as a percent of RS (-50% ... 0 ... +50%) is shown in line 5 of the application menu.

10.3 Connection optionsThe depiction of the two connection options is merely representative.

Since the tap-change potentiometer can be connected to any of the three available terminals (see also chapter 13), an exact assignment to a particular connection point is not possible.

ΔRn 100%RMRS-------⎝⎛ 1-N )+⋅=

� �

� 0� � ! � � �

� � � � � � � � 0

� � �

9 / 5 7 � 5

� � 0

7 � $ 9 / $

) $ � � � � � & � � � � � � � � � ' $ � � � � � & � � � � � � � � �

� � � � : � � � 0 � � � � * �

� �

� 0

� � ! � � �

� � �

9 / 5 7 � 5

� � 0

7 � $ 9 / $

� � � � � � � � 0

3-conductor circuit 4-conductor circuit

Page 187: ba_reg_d_gb

187

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

11 mA inputs, mA outputs

The REG-D and REG-DA Relays differ from one another in terms of design and the basic configuration of the analogue inputs and outputs.

The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is not provided with any analogue inputs, whereas the REG-DA Relay is always equipped with one analogue input module.

Both Relays can optionally be upgraded with various additional modules.

The following modules are available:

❑ Analogue input module with two analogue mA inputs

❑ Analogue module with only one input(only possible for the RG-DA)

❑ Analogue module with only one output(only possible for the RG-DA)

❑ Analogue output module with two analogue mA outputs

❑ PT100 module to connect a PT100 directly to a 3-conductor circuit

❑ Resistance module as a tap-change potentiometer(1 ... 400 Ω/tap-change)(see chapter 10 for description)

The parameterisation of the inputs and outputs is the same for both types of Relay and can be carried out using either the keypad or the WinREG parameterisation software.

It is advantageous to carry out the parameterisation using WinREG, since that is the simplest method to gain an overview of all the various parameters.

However, parameterisation using the keypad is shown in the example, since this gives an insight into the multiple possibilities and is very often required.

Page 188: ba_reg_d_gb

188

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

11.1 Analogue inputsThe individual steps are explained through the aid of an example.

Example:In this example parameterisation is carried out on a REG-DA, which is equipped with one mA input (Channel 1) as standard.

The tap-change of a transformer is delivered using a mA signal and is connected to channel 1 of the Relay.

The mA signal between 4 ... 20mA should represent a tap-change range of 1 to 17 tap-change positions.

How to proceed:

Assuming that you are in one of the display menus (regulator, transducer, etc.), select menu and then select SETUP 6 using the arrow keys.

Press F1 to select General 1

The submenus which are required for parameterising the analogue channels can then be reached by pressing F5.

Page 189: ba_reg_d_gb

189

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Up to 6 analogue channels can be selected using the up and down arrow keys.

The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can be equipped with up to six channels, whereas the REG-DA Relay can only have a maximum of 4 analogue channels.

The entry “channel 1 AI/ANA” (AI ➔ analogue input) and, for example, “channel 3 AO/ANA” (AO ➔ analogue output) is created automatically and shows that channel 1 has an analogue input and that channel 3 is hardware-prepared as an analogue output.

Select channel 1 (F2)

This is ASETUP 1, in which various characteristics of the input can be parameterised.

The analogue function can be selected using the F2 key.

Õ

Õ

Page 190: ba_reg_d_gb

190

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

The following functions are available as standard:

Notean “i” at the beginning of a line stands for input!

OFF Input is turned off

ANA Input is assigned a specific function using abackground program

iOilTp-TR Output represents the oil temperature of thetransformer

iOilTp-TR Output represents the oil temperature of thetap-changer

iOilL-TR Output represents the oil levelof the transformer

iOilL-TR Output represents the oil levelof the tap-changer

iWater Output represents the water (H20) in the oil.

iGas Output represents the amount of dissolvedgases in the oil

iTapPos Tap-change position of the transformer

NoteThe quantities OilTp-TR and OilTp-TC must be supplied using the PT100 module. The oil level, water and gas measurement quantities can only be handled if they are available as mA signals from an appropriate sensor.

Select “iTapPos” using the F2 and F4 arrow keys and then confirm the selection by pressing Enter.

Õ

Õ

Page 191: ba_reg_d_gb

191

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Choose “Pos.” for position as the analogue unit

Press F3

The available character sets can be shown by pressing “abc” (F1 key).

Select the appropriate letters using the arrow keys (up, down, left, right) and confirm the selection by pressing Enter.

You can switch between upper and lower case by pressing F2.

F4 and F5 insert and delete a character respectively.

Decimal places are not required in this case since the tap-change position is a whole-number quantity.

Õ

Õ

Page 192: ba_reg_d_gb

192

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Press F4 and then reduce the number of decimal places to zero by pressing F4 again.

Confirm your selection by pressing Enter.

The type of characteristic line can be selected under the “parameter selection” menu item.

The following settings are possible:

ALL Only for special applicationsrelated to old software versions.

Fac+Off Only for special applicationsrelated to old software versions.

P0P2 Linear characteristic line

P0P1P2 Bent characteristic line

P0P2 (linear characteristic line)A linear characteristic line has two points (beginning and end) which can be described using the points P0 and P2.

Each point is specified using an x coordinate and a y coordinate.

The characteristic lines are so constructed that mA values (input or output) are always placed on the y axis in normalised form.

The upper limit of the mA input or output is always determined by the specific hardware configuration. Therefore a normalised representation is sensible.

Example:

0 ... 20 mA is displayed as Y0 = 0 und Y2 = 1

4 ... 20 mA is displayed as Y0 = 0.2 und Y2 = 1

0 ... 5 mA is displayed as Y0 = 0 and Y2 = 1

0 ... 10 V is displayed as Y0 = 0 and Y2 = 1

Page 193: ba_reg_d_gb

193

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

P0P1P2 (bent characteristic line)

Bent characteristic lines can also be displayed.

In this case the point P1 must be entered, which is defined as lying between points P0 and P2.

y

x

P0

P2

P0-y

P2-y

P0-x P2-x

y

x

P0

P2

P0-y

P2-y

P0-x P2-x

P1P1-y

P1-x

Page 194: ba_reg_d_gb

194

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

A linear characteristic line is selected for the following tasks.

Select “P0P2” using F2 or F4 and confirm the selection by pressing Enter.

Proceed to the next menu, ASETUP2, by pressing the right arrow key.

The coordinates for the characteristic line are input in this menu.

The characteristic line points P0 and P2 are defined via coordinate pairs P0-X (output quantity at start of the line), P0-Y (input quantities at the start of the line)P2-X (output quantity at the start of the line) and P2-Y (input quantity at the end of the line).

Õ

Õ

Õ

Page 195: ba_reg_d_gb

195

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Proceed to the next menu, ASETUP3, by pressing the right arrow key.

This SETUP predefines how the analogue input should behave if the region boundaries are exceeded.

The following choices are available under “Limit Handling”:

None

High

Low

High+Low

y

x/tap-

P0

P2

P0-y (0.2)

P2-y (1)

1 17P0-x P2-x change

Õ

Page 196: ba_reg_d_gb

196

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Explanations:None: no limiting,

neither upwards nor downwards

High: Limiting, upwards onlyPractical meaning:In the selected example, the Relay woulddisplay tap-change position 17, even if theupstream measurement transducer over-

controlsand outputs,for example, 24mA instead of

20mA.

Low: Limiting, downwards onlyPractical meaning: In the selected example, the Relay would display tap-change position 1, even if

upstreammeasurement transducer outputs only 0mAinstead of 4mA.

Recommendation:In the case of inputs 4 ... 20mA, the lower limitshould not be activated, otherwise importantinformation may be lost.

If the input signal value falls below 4 mA, thedisplay remains at tap-change position 1. If thelimiting is not active, the Relay displaystap-change position 99, which could easily bemis-interpreted as an error signal.

High + Low: Limits both upwards and downwardsPractical meaning: One can decide individually in each case if thelimiting function is helpful or not. A general recommendation can therefore not

begiven for this reason.

The menu item “Input resolution” is only for information purposes. It displays the resolution with which the input signal is further internally processed.

In this case 0.05%.

Page 197: ba_reg_d_gb

197

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

You can return to the ANALOGUE I/O menu by pressing the Esc key.

If the left arrow key is pressed in this menu, the actual input and output values of the analogue values are displayed.

AnaR 1 then displays the actual value 20 mA if 20 mA is flowing in the input.

(AnaR 1= 20 mA).

Pressing the left arrow key again displays the normalised value of the input quantity.

If 20 mA hardware is being used, then the normalised value AnaN 1 = 1 if 20 mA is flowing, and AnaN 1 = 0.2 if only 4 mA is flowing.

Page 198: ba_reg_d_gb

198

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

11.2 Analogue outputs

For general information about the analogue channels, see page 187.

The individual steps are explained using an example.

Task: The tap-change position of the Relay should be output as a mA signal.

i.e. Tap-change positions 0 to 17 ➔ 4 ... 20 mA

How to proceed:

The Relay must be equipped with an analogue output module (in the example with a double module for channels 3 and 4).

Assuming that you are in one of the display menus (regulator, transducer, etc.), select menu and then select SETUP 6 using the arrow keys.

Press F1 to select General 1.

Page 199: ba_reg_d_gb

199

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

The submenus which are required for parameterising the analogue channels can then be reached by pressing F5.

Up to 6 analogue channels can be selected using the up and down arrow keys.

The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can be equipped with up to six channels, whereas the REG-DA Relay can only have a maximum of 4 analogue channels.

The entry “channel 1 AI/ANA” (AI ➔ analogue input) and “channel X AO/ANA” (AO ➔ analogue output) is created automatically and shows that channel 1 has an analogue input and that channel 3 and 4, for example, is hardware-prepared as an analogue output.

Select channel 3 (F4)

This is ASETUP1 in which the parameters

Analogue function

Analogue unit

Decimal places

can be entered.

Õ

Õ

Page 200: ba_reg_d_gb

200

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

The analogue function can be selected using the F2 key.

The following functions are available as standard:

Note„o” at the beginning of the line stands for output!

OFF Output is turned off

ANA Output is assigned a specific function using abackground program

oZero “0” is output

o+FullRng The upper limit is output (e.g. 20 mA)

o-FullRng The starting value is output(e.g. -20 mA)

NoteThe three functions can be used to check the output type (e.g. 20 mA output or 10 mA output) and its function.

oU The measured voltageis displayed as an output

oP The measured active poweris displayed as an output

oQ The measured reactive poweris displayed as an output

oS The measured apparent poweris displayed as an output

oU1 The measured voltage U1is displayed as an output

oU2 The measured voltage U2is displayed as an output

NoteThe Relay can be equipped with two voltage transformers, which can be employed for various tasks (e.g. triple-wound transformers, over and undervoltage at a transformer, etc.)

Page 201: ba_reg_d_gb

201

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

The following applies for the REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring:

U1: Voltage between terminals 2 and 5

U2: Voltage between terminals 8 and 10

Whereas, for the REG-D, the following applies:

The connection points for U1 and U2 can be found in the planning documents (see appendix).

ol1 The measured current in conductor 1is displayed as an output

ol2 The measured current in conductor 2is displayed as an output

ol3 The measured current in conductor 3is displayed as an output

oPHIDEG The measured phase angle phiis displayed as an output

oOCOSPHI The measured cos phiis displayed as an output

oFREQ The measured frequencyis displayed as an output

oOilTemp The measured oil temperatureis displayed as an output

oWindTemp The calculated hotpoint temperatureis displayed as an output

oTapPos The present tap-change position of thetransformer is displayed as an output

Please select oTapPos as an analogue function.

Confirm your selection by pressing Enter.

Õ

Õ

Page 202: ba_reg_d_gb

202

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Analogue unit:

In this case and in most other cases, the analogue unit is fixed, i.e. the system automatically applies the correct unit (“V” for voltage, “A” for current and “Hz” for frequency).

However, the unit can be freely selected if ANA is selected.

In such cases, please proceed as described below:

Press F3

The available character sets can be shown by pressing “abc” (F1 key).

Select the appropriate letters using the arrow keys (up, down, left, right) and confirm the selection by pressing Enter.

You can switch between upper and lower case by pressing F2.

F4 and F5 insert and delete a character respectively.

Õ

Page 203: ba_reg_d_gb

203

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

The measurement can be additionally influenced through the choice of decimal places (F4). For a 20 mA output the second decimal place represents a value of 0.01%.

If only one decimal place is selected all output values of the order of 0.01% are surppressed and there is a certain “calming” of the output.

Select the number of decimal places appropriate to the task.

Confirm your selection by pressing Enter.

The type of characteristic line can be selected under the “parameter selection” menu item.

The following settings are possible:

ALL Only for special applicationsrelated to old software versions.

Fac+Off Only for special applicationsrelated to old software versions.

P0P2 Linear characteristic line

P0P1P2 Bent characteristic line

Õ

Page 204: ba_reg_d_gb

204

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

P0P2A linear characteristic line has two points (beginning and end) which can be described using the points P0 and P2.

Each point is specified using an x coordinate and a y coordinate.

The characteristic lines are constructed in such a way that mA values (input or output) are always placed on the y axis in normalised form.

The upper limit of the mA input or output is always determined by the specific hardware configuration.

Therefore a normalised representation is sensible.

Example:

0 ... 20 mA is displayed as Y0 = 0 and Y2 = 1

4 ... 20 mA is displayed as Y0 = 0.2 and Y2 = 1

0 ... 5 mA is displayed as Y0 = 0 and Y2 = 1

0 ... 10 V is displayed as Y0 = 0 and Y2 = 1

y

x

P0

P2

P0-y

P2-y

P0-x P2-x

Page 205: ba_reg_d_gb

205

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

P0P1P2Bent characteristic lines can also be displayed.

In this case, the point P1 must be entered, which is defined as lying between points P0 and P2.

A bent characteristic line is selected for the following tasks.

Select “P0P2” using F2 or F4 and confirm the selection by pressing Enter.

Proceed to the next menu, ASETUP2, by pressing the right arrow key.

y

x

P0

P2

P0-y

P2-y

P0-x P2-x

P1P1-y

P1-x

Õ

Õ

Õ

Page 206: ba_reg_d_gb

206

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

The coordinates for the characteristic line are input in this menu.

The characteristic line points P0 and P2 are defined by the coordinate pairs P0-X (input quantity at the beginning of the line), P0-Y (output quantity at the beginning of the line)P2-X (input quantity at the end of the line) and P2-Y (output quantity at the end of the line).

Select the following characteristic line parameters using F2 to F5:

P0-X 1 (for tap-change position 1)

P0-Y 0.2 (0.2 x 20 mA = 4 mA) as a normalised value of the 20 mA output

value.

P2-X 17 (for tap-change position 17)

P2-Y 1 (1 x 20 mA = 20 mA) as a normalised value of the 20 mA output

value.

Confirm all input information by pressing Enter!

y

x/tap-

P0

P2

P0-y (0.2)

P2-y (1)

1 17P0-x P2-x change

Page 207: ba_reg_d_gb

207

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Proceed to the next menu, ASETUP3, by pressing the right arrow key.

This SETUP primarily defines how the analogue input should behave if the range limits are exceeded.

The following options are available under “Limit Handling”:

None

High

Low

High+Low

Explanations:

None: no limiting, neither upwards nor downwards

High: Limiting, upwards onlyPractical meaning: In the selected example, the Relaywould output 20 mA if thetransformer is in tap-change position 20.

Low: Limiting, downwards onlyPractical meaning: In the selected example, the Relaywill output 4 mA if the level has avalue smaller than 1

High + Low Limits upwards and downwardsPractical meaning: One can decide individually in each case if thelimiting function is helpful or not.

A general recommendation cantherefore not be given for this reason.

Õ

Page 208: ba_reg_d_gb

208

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

The built-in simulator can be used to check the settings (see chapter 8).

Simulate a tap-change (see chapter 8.4 on page 146).

Select SETUP 6, F1, F5 again. The ANALOGUE I/O [1-4] menu will appear in the display.

If the left arrow key is pressed in this menu, the actual output value of the analogue value will be displayed.

Assuming that tap-change position 17 has been simulated, AnaR 3 delivers an output of 20 mA. The actual value of AnaR 3 is also 20 mA, and this can be checked using a mA meter.

Pressing the left arrow key again displays the normalised value of the output quantity.

If 20 mA hardware is being used, the normalised value AnaN 1 = 1 if 20 mA is flowing, and AnaN 1 = 0.2 if only 4 mA is flowing (level 1).

The parameterisation has now been completed.

Press the ESC key twice to return to the regulator, transducer, recorder, etc. in the main menu.

Page 209: ba_reg_d_gb

209

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

12 Updating the Operating Software

A zero modem cable is required to update the operating software. A hardware handshake is also required due to the high baud rate. For this reason, the RTS/CTS lines must be linked crosswise.

9-pole Sub-D socket 9-pole Sub-D socket1 ---------- ----------- ---------- 42 ---------- ----------- ---------- 33 ---------- ----------- ---------- 24 ---------- ----------- ---------- 15 ---------- ----------- ---------- 56 ---------- ----------- ---------- 67 ---------- ----------- ---------- 88 ---------- ----------- ---------- 79 ---------- ----------- ---------- 9

Shield ----------- Shield

Page 210: ba_reg_d_gb

210

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

12.1 Preparing the PC

12.1.1 Windows NT/2000/XP operating system

➪ Open the “Control panel” window.

➪ Open the “System” window (1)

➪ Select the “Hardware” tab (2)

➪ Start the “Device manager” (3)

➪ Select and open the communication port (COM 1 or COM 2) (4)

➪ Select the “Hardware settings” tab (5)

➪ Enter settings (6)Bits/seconds: 115200Data bits: 8Parity: noneStop bits: 1Protocol: Hardware

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Page 211: ba_reg_d_gb

211

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

➪ Confirm selection by pressing “OK” (7)

➪ Close the remaining windows

➪ Connect the cable to the selected PC COM interface.

➪ Connect the cable to the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring at the COM 1 interface.

12.2 Starting the bootstrap loaderIn order to update the system software, the bootstrap loader must be started in the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring. It is only possible to carry out this procedure in the REG-D Status menu (“SETUP 6” / Status Menu).

➪ Use the F3 key to set the baud rate to exactly the same value as that of your PC.

➪ Downloading is carried out by means of the “update32.exe” program on the PC.

➪ After starting “update32.exe”, select the interface and press “OK” to confirm.

➪ Specify the PC interface in the “Configure / Baudrate” menu to be 11520 baud.

press down for approx. 3 s

��

��

Page 212: ba_reg_d_gb

212

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Caution!If a version of the bootstrap loader older than 1.07 (e.g. 1.06) is installed on your REG-D, it must first be updated to version 1.07. The current bootstrap loader is available to be downloaded from our website (www.a-eberle.de). Select the menu item “Update / new bootstrap loader” to begin the bootstrap loader update. The firmware can be updated after successfully updating the bootstrap loader.

➪ The firmware update can be started by selecting the “Update / update all” menu item.

Page 213: ba_reg_d_gb

213

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Other items in the update menu:

Firmware: Update the firmware without the help text.

Help text: Update the help text.

REG-L Download: Transfer background programsfrom the PC to the REG-D.

REG-L Upload: Transfer and saving of the background

programs from the PC to the REG-D. Serves to protect the backgroundprograms, since they are not

protectedduring the reading of the parameterswith WinREG.

Communication Card Update: Data transfer from the PC to the

instrumentation and control card

➪ In newer devices, the program automatically recognises whether a REG-D or a PAN-D is connected.If recognition is not possible (this could be the case with older devices), selection is carried out via a dialogue.

The further process runs automatically. A reset occurs after completion of the download. A message appears to indicate that the device is ready for use.

Page 214: ba_reg_d_gb

214

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

❑ If other messages appear, an error has occurred and the download must be repeated.

NoteIf you have further questions, please send us an E-mail: “[email protected]

➪ Press “F4” to exit the bootstrap loader.

➪ Press “F5” to abort the data transfer

��

��

Page 215: ba_reg_d_gb

215

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

13 Updating AnalogueInputs, Outputs,Tap-Change Potentiometer Input

How to proceed:

➪ Remove the front panel of the REG-D(Unscrew the four crosshead screws and pull off the ribbon cable)

➪ Remove the REG-CPU board(Unscrew 2 screws and 2 safety rings, then carefully lift out the CPU board)

➪ Add the analogue modules to the REG-CPU board and place it back inside the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring(Note 2 plug connections)

Available terminals for analogue modules

Battery

Mod

ule

1M

odul

e 2

Mod

ule

3

REG-CPU board

Page 216: ba_reg_d_gb

216

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Analogue module pin assignment

After inserting the analogue double module, it will be automatically recognised and treated accordingly.

The channel assignment is as follows:

Module 1.1 - Channel 1Module 1.2 - Channel 2Module 2.1 - Channel 3Module 2.2 - Channel 4Module 3.1 - Channel 5Module 3.2 - Channel 6

➪ Screw the REG-CPU board and front panel back on tightly (and connect the ribbon cable).

➪ Load firmware version ≥ 1.74 using the download program.

➪ Load background and P programmes in the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring (update32.exe)

If a step-change potentiometer module is to be connected to a terminal at a later date, please consult the accompanying documentation.

/

1�������������/���%

*

1�������������/���%

*

1�������������/���%

*

1�������������/���%

*

1�������������/���%

*

1�������������/���%

*

1 / / / / /1 1 1 1 1

� � � � �

� �

� � � � � � � � � �

� � � �

��

� � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � � , � � � � � � � � � - .

� � � ) � � � � � � ) � � ) �

% � ) ! � % � ) ! � � % � ) ! � �

Page 217: ba_reg_d_gb

217

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

14 Maintenance and Current Consumption

14.1 Cleaning informationThe surface of the device can be cleaned with a dry cloth at any time.

If the inside becomes dirty due to improper use, it is recommended that you send the device back to the manufacturer.

If a large amount of dust has accumulated on the terminal blocks, the insulator coordination could fail.

Dust particles are generally hygroscopic and can bridge creepage distances.

For this reason we recommend operating the device with the doors closed.

Page 218: ba_reg_d_gb

218

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

14.2 Changing fuses

Caution!Before changing fuses, it is essential that the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is disconnected from the power supply!

Required fuse: T2L 250 V, 2 A microfuseThe fuse holder can be found on terminal block 3 and the replacement fuse is on the back of terminal block 3.

14.3 Changing the battery

Caution!Before changing the battery it is essential that the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is disconnected from the power supply!

Required battery: Lithium 3 V with soldering tagsType SANYO CR 14250 SE (3 V)

Service life: in storage > 6 years

when in operation with a switch-onduration > 50 %> 10 years

We recommend having the battery changed in the factory.

T2A FUSE Fuse holder type 2 A

REG-NTZ

Replacement fuse

Page 219: ba_reg_d_gb

219

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

14.4 REG-D current consumption

Measuring circuit (100 V DC)

Measuring results

The measured values provide information regarding the fuse selection.

REG-D30

28

1 Ω / 1%

Sensor head10:1220μF

100 V

GOSSEN

0 ... 150 V300 mA

7 ms

3 V= 3 A

Power-up spike of 100 V DC

6

5

4

3

2

1

Measured at Peak60 V DC approx. 2 A110 V DC approx. 3 A

110 V AC approx. 3 A220 V DC approx. 5 A230 V AC approx. 5 A

Page 220: ba_reg_d_gb

220

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

15 Storage Information

The devices should be stored in clean, dry rooms. The devices and their respective replacement modules can be stored between -25 °C and +65 °C.

The relative humidity must not cause the formation of either condensation or ice.

We recommend that the storage temperature remains within the temperature range -10 °C to +55 °C to ensure that the built-in electrolytic capacitor does not age prematurely.

We also recommend that the device be connected to an auxiliary voltage every two years to reform the electrolytic capacitors. This procedure should also be carried out before the device is put into operation. In extreme climatic conditions (tropics), this also simultaneously ensures “pre-heating” and helps to avoid the formation of condensation.

The device should be stored in the service room for at least two hours prior to being connected to the voltage for the first time so that it can become accustomed to the ambient temperature there and to avoid the formation of moisture and condensation.

Page 221: ba_reg_d_gb

221

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

16 Background Information

16.1 Regulator modeThe command variable W and the actual value X of the line voltage are continuously compared in the Relay in order to maintain a constant line voltage. The command variable W is either a fixed value or a variable value which is the sum of fixed setpoint values and the changeable voltage drop on the lines to the consumers.

The difference between the actual value X and the control variable W (the regulative deviation Xw) is calculated according to a selected function in the Relay and summed until a specified integral value is reached. As soon as this integral value is reached, the integrator is set to zero and a signal (correcting variable) is simultaneously output which triggers the tap-changer (actuator) of the transformer and thus changes its ratio. The integration begins anew after each tap-change procedure.

The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring functions as a three-tap-change regulator with a deadband. No control commands will be output if the actual value lies within this deadband.

The parameters for the time behaviour of the Relay can be optimally adapted to the dynamic time behaviour of the line voltage (controlled system) so that a high degree of control quality (high voltage constancy) can be achieved with a low number of changes and the actuator is not overly stressed.

All of the Relays can control several parallel-switched transformers on one busbar without requiring further devices. The transformers are regulated according to a specific algorithm in such a way that the reactive part of the circulating current is minimised. Thus transformers with different outputs and different tap-change voltages can also be parallel-switched.

Page 222: ba_reg_d_gb

222

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

16.2 Command variable WThe command variable W for the voltage of the tap-changing transformer may either be a fixed value (setpoint value) or a variable value (setpoint value + a variable). A variable command variable W can consist of, for example, the sum of a fixed setpoint value and the share of the voltage drop on a line up to a certain point in the circuit. This makes it possible to maintain the voltage at a constant level even if the load and the primary voltage are changing.

16.2.1 Fixed command variableThe command variable W is input into the Relay as a voltage setpoint value and remains constant. The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring maintains the voltage at the transformer at the setpoint value independent of the primary voltage and the corresponding load current (the voltage drop on the line).

Adjusting the setpoint / Switching to a different setpoint valueNormally up to 4 setpoint values can be pre-selected. If the present setpoint value is to be changed, this change can be carried out on the Relay either manually or by switching to another setpoint value which has already been pre-selected. At the same time the previous setpoint value becomes ineffective.

The change to another setpoint value can be activated either via an external signal or by using a background program.

Uset

Iactual

e.g. Ib

Voltageregulation

Currentinfluence

Xu=f (Uactual,

Xi = f (I)

Xp = f (...)

Uactu

Parallelprograms

Gradient

Perm. Icr

Limitation

Integrator

Raise

Lower=

=

(W)

(X)

(XW)

Page 223: ba_reg_d_gb

223

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

16.2.2 Variable command variableThe command variable W for regulating the voltage at a given position on a line is the sum of a fixed setpoint value XR and the variable value of a correction value XK.

W [V] = XR [V] + XK [V]

The correction value XK takes the data of the assigned line and load into consideration (voltage drop Uf), so that the voltage at the given position − the load point of the line − can be held approximately constant.

It is assumed that the network is generally loaded symmetrically, i.e. that the current in each line is approximately the same. The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can therefore be connected to the current transformer of any line (L1, L2, L3).

Measuring the voltage drop Uf on the lineThe voltage drop Uf on the line between the transformer and the consumer is the difference between the r.m.s. values of both voltages on the busbar and at the load point. The voltage drop depends on the impedance of the line, the current strength and the cos ϕ at the consumer.

The following formula defines the impedance of a line:

Z = RL + j ω LL + 1 / j ω CL

Measuring the voltage drop Uf as a function of the rated currentWhen the reactances of the line can be neglected and the cos ϕ at the consumer remains constant, the voltage drop Uf can be measured as a function of the nominal current.

Uf = f (I, R)

The gradient of the Uf/IL characteristic line required for the correct measurement of Uf must be determined according to the operating conditions (see “Nominal value of the gradient” on page 227).

Page 224: ba_reg_d_gb

224

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Control variables for UfIf the cos ϕ at the consumer varies, it is possible to select the active I cos ϕ or the reactive I sin ϕ component of the current as the control variable for Uf rather than current intensity I itself. The reactive component has either a positive or negative sign to differentiate between an inductive or a capacitive load respectively.

Measuring the voltage drop as a function of the current strength and cos ϕ(LDC = line drop compensation)

If the reactance of the line cannot be neglected when measuring the voltage drop and the cos ϕ at the consumer is not constant, the following formula l applies for measuring Uf:

Uf = (R + j XL) ⋅ (I cos ϕ2 - j I sin ϕ2) = R I (cos ϕ2 - j sin ϕ2) + XL I (sin ϕ2 + j cos ϕ2)

By inputting the values for R and XL, a replica of the line can be created in the Relay. This enables the voltage difference (of the r.m.s. values) between the beginning of the line (transformer) and the selected load point to be measured in relation to the current intensity and the cos ϕ2. The value can then be used as the correction value Xk (see “Variable command variable” on page 223).

Uf = U1 - U2

The angle at the load point is defined as ϕ2. However, in most cases the difference between ϕ at the transformer and ϕ at the load point may be neglected (see example).

The current and voltage paths (L1, L2, L3 as well as S1/k and S2/l) must be correctly connected in order to be able to measure the correct angle.

Example:Given: R = 30 Ω; XL = 82 Ω; I = 100 A; cos ϕ2 = 0.7; U2 = 110 kV at the end of the line.

When calculating using voltage pointers (for complex quantities use the E-2.5.2 EXCEL program which can be downloaded from our website, www.a-eberle.de), the result is the following

Page 225: ba_reg_d_gb

225

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

exact valueUf = U1 - U2 = 7.96 kV. (The angle difference of the voltage pointer between the beginning and the load point is approximately 2°).

The voltage at the transformer must thus be regulated to the r.m.s. value U1 = 110 kV + 7.96 kV = 117.96 kV (command variable W).

Setting R and XL The differences between the entered values and the actual values of R and XL as well as the difference between the cos ϕ at the transformer and at the consumer (the voltage indicators of U1 and U2 have different angles) may be eliminated by readjusting R and XL.

If values exist for the inductive and resistive voltage drop between the feeding point and the load point, they can be converted to resistances (R and X) using a simple mathematical equation.

Divide the voltages by 10 and enter the resulting values as the resistances R and X.

Example: Ux = 12 V

Ur = 25 V

Thus:

X = 1.2 Ohms

R = 2.5 Ohms

Page 226: ba_reg_d_gb

226

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

16.2.3 Current-dependent setpoint value increment

Determining the voltage levels XR and UfThe voltage level XR (setpoint value) should correspond to the required voltage at a minimum current.

The voltage level Uf is a function of the gradient of the linear Uf/IL-characteristic line. Adding this voltage to the entered setpoint value XR (increasing the setpoint value) cancels out the voltage drop on the line.

Various programs are available for incrementing the setpoint value:

❑ setpoint value increment dependent on apparent current

❑ setpoint value increment dependent on active current

❑ setpoint value increment dependent on reactive current.

The line-drop compensation using the LDC process was described in the previous chapter.

Apart from the LDC process, the most commonly used method is compensation based on the apparent current and this is described in more detail below.

Please observe that the positive or negative sign of the active power is taken into consideration when the current-dependent setpoint value is increased.

The current-dependent setpoint value increment is active if power is being consumed and is inactive when power is being supplied.

This procedure - which works in the interest of network operation - can only be carried out properly and reliably when the direction of the active power is input correctly.

Uf [V]

0

0

IL

107.5 V 21.5 kV

100 V 20 kV100 A 700 A 800 A

5 A0.625 A 4.375 A

4.688 V

6.563 V

7.5 V

Page 227: ba_reg_d_gb

227

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

In this case a positive sign for active power indicates incoming power (setpoint value increment permissible), whereas a negative sign indicates outgoing power, and the setpoint increment function is disabled.

The connections for both the voltage and the current must be correctly assigned in order to detect the direction of the active power.

Therefore, please check the connections for current and voltage, as well as the assignments (SETUP 5, F2) and lastly check the sign for active power in the transducer mode.

Nominal value of the gradientThe nominal value of the gradient Gnom indicates the % change in the nominal voltage when the current strength changes from 0 to 100% of the I1n nominal current of the current transformer that is mounted in the network.

UNom = 100 V

(ΔU in relation to ΔIL [A])

Thus for the voltage Uf = f (I)

Limitation of the voltage level UfTo prevent the command variable from exceeding a certain limit value in the event of overcurrent, the gradient of the linear Uf/IL characteristic line must be set to zero from a specified value of the current onwards. The characteristic line is horizontal after this point.

StNom %[ ] ΔU V[ ]UNom V[ ]---------------------- 100%⋅=

Uf V[ ] ΔU V[ ]=StNom %[ ]

100%------------------------- UNom V[ ]

Iactual A[ ]I1N A[ ]

------------------------⎝ ⎠⎛ ⎞⋅ ⋅=

Page 228: ba_reg_d_gb

228

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Measuring the required gradientThe two value pairs, voltage and current strength, must be known at a light load as well as at full load to measure the required nominal value Gnom [%].

Please note that the gradient and the setpoint value cannot be set independently from each other for this type of characteristic line, because when Gnom [%] is > 0%, the command variable W, which is already at the minimum current value Imin > 0, would be unintentionally increased.

Example:The voltage at a particular point in the network is to be held constant at 20 kV under a variable load.

Nominal values of the voltage transformer:

U1n = 20 kV; U2n = 100 V; Knu = 200

Nominal values of the current transformer:

I1n = 800 A; I2n = 5 A; Kni = 160

Measured value pairs:

Primary side:

The difference between the currentsΔI [A] = Imax - Imin = 700 A - 100 A = 600 A

Secondary side (primary values/Kni):

The difference between the currentsΔI [A] = Imax - Imin = 4.375 A - 0.625 A = 3.750 A

Absolute voltage changeΔU [V] = 21.5 kV - 20.5 kV = 1.0 kV

Voltage change in percentΔU [%] = (1.0 kV / 20.0 kV) 100 % = 5 %

Values atlight load Pmin

Values atfull load Pmax

Current intensity I Imin = 100 A Imax = 700 A

Control variable w wmin = 20.5 kV wmax = 21.5 kV

Page 229: ba_reg_d_gb

229

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

To raise the voltage of the transformer at full load (Imax) to 21.5 kV, the command variable must be ΔU = 1.0 kV, or 5% of the nominal voltage U1n higher than the set setpoint value XR.

Calculating the nominal value of the gradient Gnom [%]

Setpoint value reductionWith a light load and this gradient, the command variable W would be increased to

This corresponds to (100 A / 800 A) 6.67% = 0.83% of the nominal voltage.

Thus, the setpoint value XR would have to be set lower by 0.83% in order to maintain the voltage level at 20.5 kV during a light load.

Adjusting the settingsAt full load, the reduction of the setpoint value, however, causes the command variable W to be lowered so that a compromise must be found between the increase in Gnom [%] and the decrease in the reduction of the setpoint value.

StNom %[ ] ΔU V[ ]UNom V[ ]---------------------- 100 %

I1NΔI--------⋅⋅=

StNom %[ ] 1.0 kV20 kV---------------- 100 % 800 A

600 A--------------- 6.67 %=⋅⋅=

W 1IminI1n---------⎝⎛+

StNom100%--------------⎠

⎞ UNom⋅ ⋅=

W 1 100 A800 A---------------⎝⎛+ 6.67%

100%---------------⎠

⎞ 20.5 kV 20.67 kV =⋅ ⋅=

Page 230: ba_reg_d_gb

230

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Set the setpoint value and the gradient as follows

16.3 Summary and Examplesfor Current Influencing

ParametersGradient:

Specifies the setpoint value increment compared to 100 V with nominal current.

e.g. Gradient, Grad., = 5 %:When the nominal current is reached, the voltage is increased by 5 % of 100 V. The nominal current can be 1/5 A. In this case, when the nominal current is reached the setpoint value increases by 5 V.

Limitation:

Max. setpoint value increment in % compared to 100 V.

e.g. Limitation, Lim., = 4%:Max. voltage increment of 4 % compared to 100 V is 4 V.

Voltageat full load

Voltageat light load

Action

Too high Correct Setpoint no change,lower the gradient

Too low Correct Setpoint no change,increase the gradient

Setpoint value settingat full load

Setpoint value settingat light load

Action

Correct Too high reduce setpoint valueincrease the gradient

Correct Too low increase the setpoint valuelower the gradient

Page 231: ba_reg_d_gb

231

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

No further increase takes place once the 4 V limit is reached.

The tolerance band remains unchanged. The permissible regulative deviation is not affect by the voltage increase.

The setpoint value, corrected to include the voltage increase, is not shown. However, it is indicated by the black colour of the arrow in the bar graph display.

Current-dependent voltage increase The currently-active setpoint value Uset,corr. is calculated as follows:

If ΔU > ΔB, then ΔU is limited to the size of ΔB.

Current-influencing programsApparent current: Ixd = I

The apparent current is used to determine the voltage increase. Increases only take place when the active power is positive.

Uset corr, Uset ΔU+= ΔU Grad100 %--------------- 100 V×

IxdIn------×=

Setpoint value [V]

Uppertolerance band

Setpoint

Lowertolerance band

106

107

105

104

103

102

101

100

99

980 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1

Current normalised to 1/5 A.

Gradient = 5 %

Limitation = 4 %

Setpoint value = 100 V = 100 %

Permissible regulative deviation = 1 %

Page 232: ba_reg_d_gb

232

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

This method can be used to compensate the voltage drop if cosϕ is relatively constant.

Active current: Isd = Iw = I x cosϕ (with +/- sign)

The active current is used to determine the change in the setpoint value. If a negative active current flows (energy fed back), the setpoint value is decreased. The limitation is symmetrical and applies to both increases and decreases.

Reactive current: Ixd = Ib = I x sinϕ (with +/- sign)

The reactive current is used to determine the voltage increase. The increase/decrease is independent of the sign of the active power. It is increased if the reactive current is inductive, and decreased if it is capacitive.

This program is primarily used if the cosϕ of the network varies by a large amount.

LDC (Line Drop Compensation):

Used to compensate the voltage drop on a line when the active and reactive resistances are known. This process can also be used if the cosϕ of the consumer is not constant. The gradient is not required for this process. The limitation, however, continues to apply.

AbbreviationsIxd: Current used to determine the voltage increase [A]

I: Apparent current, measurement quantity [A]

Iw: Active current [A]

Ib: Reactive current [A]

In: Nominal current of the current transformer 1/5 A [A]

Grad.: Gradient [%]

Lim.: Limitation [L]

ΔB: Limitation of the voltage increase [V]

ΔU: Increase in setpoint value [V]

Uset: Specified setpoint value [V]

Uset,corr the setpoint value corrected to include the voltage increase [V]

Page 233: ba_reg_d_gb

233

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

16.4 Regulative deviations

16.4.1 Regulative deviation XwThe regulative deviation Xw is the difference between the actual value X of the regulating variable and the command variable W. The sign of the regulative deviation can be plus or minus.

NoteThe regulative deviation Xw corresponds to the negative regulation difference Xd.

16.4.2 Permissible regulative deviation XwzTo minimise the number of switches of the tap-changer, a deviation in the line voltage from the command variable W is tolerated within certain limits, i.e. a specific regulative deviation is permissible.

This permissible regulative deviation Xwz is entered as a ± n% of the control variable W (independent of all the other limit values expressed in %) and sets the limits for the maximum permissible relative fluctuation of the line voltage above and below the control value W. For this reason the absolute limit values of the tolerance band are dependent on the set control variable W.

When the line voltage dips into this tolerance band, the regulation process is interrupted and the integrator is set to zero so that the regulation/integration process only begins again when the line voltage overshoots or undershoots the limits of the tolerance band.

Thus fluctuations in the line voltage within the permissible regulative deviation have no effect on the regulation process.

Xw V[ ] X V[ ] W V[ ] Xw %[ ] W V[ ]⋅100 %

------------------------------------=–=

Xw %[ ] Xw V[ ]W V[ ]---------------- 100 %⋅=

Page 234: ba_reg_d_gb

234

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

16.4.3 Displaying the permissible regulative deviation XwThe deviation of the line voltage X from the command variable W is indicated analogously on the scale of the Relay. The colour of the pointer changes from light to dark when the voltage exceeds the permissible regulative deviation Xwz.

When indicating the permissible regulative deviation Xwz, the setpoint value correction Xk for compensating the voltage drop in the line is not taken into consideration.

16.4.4 Setting the permissible regulative deviation XwzThe tolerance band determined by the permissible regulative deviation Xwz (± n% of the control variable W) must be higher than the tap-change of the transformer in percent, because otherwise the changed output voltage of the transformer would violate the opposite limit of the permissible regulative deviation after a control command has been executed. Furthermore, after having reached the integral value, a control command would be output to reset the previous transformer tap-changer position. This procedure would be constantly repeated, i.e. this would lead to frequent tap-changes of the transformer and thus to unwanted fluctuations in the line voltage.

In order to have sufficient distance from the upper and lower limits of the permissible regulative deviation, the following formula applies

2 ⋅ |± Xwz [%]| > ΔUTap [%]

or

|± Xwz [%]| > 0.5 ΔUTap [%]

Guide value for XwzThe following guide value is generally recommended for the permissible regulative deviation Xwz:

|± Xwz [%]| ≥ 0.6 ΔUTap [%]

Page 235: ba_reg_d_gb

235

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Example for determining the permissible regulative deviation

Nominal voltage UNom = 100 kV

Number of levels ± 15

Setting range 85 kV ... 115 kV

Tap-change increment: (115 kV - 85 kV): 30 levels =1 kV / tap-change

Thus 1 kV corresponds to the value of 1% of Unom

With this data, the permissible regulative deviation Xwz should not be less than the value Xwz = ± 0.6 ⋅ 1.0 kV = ± 0.6 kV (± 0.6%) The absolute limits are thus 100.6 kV and 99.4 kV.

If, for example, the upper limit is exceeded and the voltage is set back by one tap-change, the voltage is reduced to 100.6kV – 1.0 kV = 99.6 kV, i.e. the lower limit of 99.4 kV is not undershot. The voltage remains within the range of the permissible regulative deviation.

16.5 Monitoring extreme operation values(faults)

If a fault occurs in the network, e.g. inadmissibly or extremely high/low voltages or currents, the Relay must not switch the transformer tap-changer to the highest or lowest tap-changer position. This occurs to prevent the line voltage having an impermissible value after the cause of the fault has been eliminated. These monitoring tasks are carried out by additional limit signals.

16.5.1 Limit signal

Switching time delayThe difference in time between when the limit value is reached and when the signal is transmitted is defined as the time delay. A specific time delay can be selected (parameterised) for each limit signal.

NotePlease note that the actual switching time delay can exceed the parameterised switching time delay by up to 2 seconds. This difference is due to the procedure selected for determining the measured values.

Page 236: ba_reg_d_gb

236

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Switching hysteresis, switching difference XsdThe difference in the input values between the switching on and off of the limit signal after the limit value violation has disappeared is defined as the switching difference. The hysteresis Xsd has a standard value of 1% of 100 V (corresponds to 1 V).

Assignment of the limit signalEach of the following limit values is monitored by one limit signal. A special additional function is activated for certain types of limit signals.

In the menu you have the option of selecting if a binary output or LED should be activated if a limit value violation occurs.

NoteAny number of additional limit signals can be generated via the REG-L programming language (as a background program).

Setting the limit values/plausibility checkThe limit signal can be set freely for each limit signal within a given range. Therefore the user must check the logical relations of the values with each other.

Limit signal trigger (G1)When U > G1: Activation of the INHIBIT LOW Relay function (no control commands are output) in the event of undervoltage.

Setting range: 100 V ≤ G1 ≤ 150 V

The limit signal can be connected to a binary output (Rel 3, Rel 4, Rel 5 or Rel 7 ... REl 10 if required.

The limit value violation is displayed on the screen and can be additionally signalled via a freely programmable LED (LED 1 ... LED7).

Backwards high-speed switching limit signal (G2)When U > G2: Activation of the BACKWARDS HIGH-SPEED SWITCHING function (for more information on the fastest series of control commands, see “High-speed switching Add-On” on page 240).

Page 237: ba_reg_d_gb

237

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Setting range: 1.00 X0 ≤ G2 ≤ 1.35 X0 (0% ... +35%)

The limit value is normally given as a %.

X0 represents the reference value (setpoint).

No more control commands will be output after the dip into the tolerance band ± Xwz. The limit signal can be connected to a binary output (Rel 3, Rel 4, Rel 5 or Rel 7 ... Rel 10) if required. Furthermore, the limit value violation can be signalled by a freely programmable LED (LED1 ... LED7).

Forward high-speed switching limit signal (G3)When U < G3: Activation of the FORWARDS HIGH-SPEED SWITCHING function (for more information on the fastest series of control commands, see “High-speed switching Add-On” on page 240).

This function is not available if the Relay is operated in the “Creeping Net Breakdown” mode.Reason: A rapid sequence of raise commands cause the Relay to switch to standstill.

Setting range: 0.65 X0 ≤ G3 ≤ 1.00 X0 (-35% ... 0%)

The limit value is normally given as a %.

X0 represents the reference value (setpoint).

The limit value signal can be connected to a binary output (Rel 3, Rel 4, Rel 5 or Rel 7 ... Rel 10) if required. Furthermore, the limit value violation can be signalled using a freely programmable LED.

Limit signal > U (G4)The overvoltage >U is a limit value that only influences the regulation in special operating circumstances, and that can be parameterised if required using an LED or an output relay.

If the voltage exceeds the >U limit then all “raise” commands are surpressed.

The limit value particularly influences the regulation when operating with several setpoints and using an absolute value (100 V / 110 V) as the limit value for >U.

Setting range: 0 ... +25% *

Further information: see “> U Overvoltage” on page 112

Page 238: ba_reg_d_gb

238

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Limit signal >I (G5)I > G5: selectable action and activation of the STANDSTILL Relay function (no control commands are output) in the event of overcurrent. However, the STANDSTILL function will only be activated if it has been previously activated in the menu “Add-On 5”. The activate function is signalled by an LED on the front panel of the REG-D.

The selected rated value (1 A or 5 A) always applies as the limit value reference X0.

Setting range: 1.00 X0 ≤ G5 ≤ 2.10 X0 (0% ... 210%)

Limit value transmitter < U (G6)The undervoltage <U is a limit value that only influences the regulation in special operating circumstances, and that can be parameterised if required using an LED or an output relay.

If the voltage falls below the <U limit, all “lower” commands are surpressed.

The limit value particularly influences the regulation if operating with several setpoints and using an absolute value (100 V / 110 V) as the limit value for <U.

Setting range: -25% ... 0% *

Further information: see “< U Undervoltage” on page 111

Limit value transmitter <I (G7)I < G7: Activation of the STANDSTILL Relay function in the event of undercurrent (no issuing of control commands).

Setting range: 0.0 X0 ≤ G7 ≤ 1.00 X0

The limit value is normally given as a %.

X0 represents the reference value.

You can chose 100 V or 110 V as the reference value for the setpoint.

(See also Add-On 5, F2)

The limit value signal can be connected to a binary output (Rel 3, Rel 4, Rel 5 or Rel 7 ... Rel 10) if required. Furthermore, the limit value violation can be signalled by a freely programmable LED (LED1 ... LED7).

Page 239: ba_reg_d_gb

239

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

The selected rated value (1 A or 5 A) applies as the limit value reference.

Inhibit low limit value transmitter (G8)When U < G8: Activation of the limit signal and of the STANDSTILL Relay function (no issuing of control commands see “Relay inhibit low function” on page 241).

Setting range: 0.25 X0 ≤ G8 ≤ 1.00 X0 (-75% ... +0%)

The limit value is normally given as a %.

X0 represents the reference value.

You can chose 100 V or 110 V as the reference value for the setpoint.

(See also Add-On 5, F2)

The limit value signal can be connected to a binary output (Rel 3, Rel 4, Rel 5 or Rel 7 ... Rel 10) if required. Furthermore, the limit value violation can be signalled using a freely programmable LED.

Reference value X0 and reference value for the limit valuesThe upper and lower limit value may be set as a relative value in % of the present setpoint value or as an absolute value in relation to the nominal value of the voltage Unom see “Parameters” on page 292.

Example for relative limits:

If the “Setpoint value X” is selected as the reference value, all of the limit values change in relation to the respective entered setpoint value.

Setpoint value: X = 102.0 V; limit values: ± 10%;

thus the upper limit is 112.2 V and the lower limit is 91.8 V.

Example for absolute limits:

If “Unom= 100 V” is selected as the reference value, all of the limit values refer to the nominal voltage of 100 V and are independent of the present setpoint value.

Reference value: Unom = 100 V, Setpoint: 105 V, limit values: ± 10% of Unom; thus the lower limit is 90 V and the upper limit is 110 V.

Page 240: ba_reg_d_gb

240

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

16.6 Add-Ons

16.6.1 High-speed switching Add-OnUsing the high-speed switching add-on switches off the reaction delay (regulation behaviour, see page 245), i.e. the control commands for the tap-changer are output in the shortest possible time sequence. The Relay quickly regulates the tap-changer via successive control commands in the same direction (RAISE or LOWER) back to a tap-changer position with which the voltage of the transformer is within the permissible regulative deviation. The high-speed switching then becomes inactive again. This ensures that transformer output voltages that are too high or too low are quickly eliminated.

The user can set the shortest time between control commands (the tap-changer in operation time) according to the time requirement of a tap-change operation (SETUP 5, F1, F2) so that only command change operations that can be carried out are given.

There are two different types of control to avoid the tap-changer drives being triggered by a sequence of control commands that is too fast.

➪ If a Relay input E1 ... E16 is configured as the tap-changer in operation input (with the exception of E5 and E6), the Relay will not output the control commands until 2 s after the tap-changer in operation “drops”.

➪ If the tap-changer in operation is not output to the Relay, the Relay will output the control commands with a time separation corresponding to the set “maximum time tap-changer in operation” (SETUP 5 - Add-On 1).

ActivationThe high-speed switching operation of the Relay is activated either internally (standard program) or externally via a binary signal. A binary input signal can also be used to activate the high-speed switching operation even if the actual voltage value is not sufficient to require it.

Page 241: ba_reg_d_gb

241

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

16.6.2 Relay inhibit low functionThe output of control commands to the tap-changer is blocked in inhibit low (standstill) mode (the output is “set to a standstill”). The standstill is active until the line voltage no longer violates the limit value for the standstill. The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring will continue to function again normally approximately 5 s after the line voltage violation has ended.

ActivationThe Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is switched to inhibit low either internally (standard program) or externally via a binary signal.

Trigger

Backward high-speed

>U

Permissible regulative

<UForward high-speed Undervoltage inhibit low

Tap-changes

G1

G2

G4

G3

G8

Setpoint

G6

RaiseLowe

Page 242: ba_reg_d_gb

242

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

16.6.3 Measuring the “Creeping Net Breakdown”The “Creeping Net Breakdown” add-on is mainly used to increase the voltage back to the starting value if the voltage on the high voltage side has fallen for a certain period of time.

A Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring generally initially reacts with tap-changes in the direction of a higher voltage in such cases to maintain a constant secondary voltage.

If the voltage on the primary side suddenly returns to its default value, the transformer will be set to a tap that is too high (high voltage) and will have to be regulated back in the direction of a lower voltage.

In order to steady the network, these procedures may be optimised by means of the “Creeping Net Breakdown” add-on.

If the regulative deviation is so large that - during a certain time period - more than a specified number of control commands in the same direction (only RAISE) is required to eliminate the regulative deviation, the REG-D can react in two different ways:

➪ The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring does not output any control commands. It leaves the “AUTOMATIC” operation mode and remains in the “MANUAL” operation mode until the switchover back to “AUTOMATIC” is carried out, either via the MANUAL key or via a remote control command.

➪ The Relay blocks all further control commands for a lock time (1 min ... 20 min). This lock is automatically removed by the following:a) after the selected lock time has run outorb) after the first LOWER control command is output

(i.e. when the upper limit of the regulative deviationis violated).

Page 243: ba_reg_d_gb

243

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

The “creeping net breakdown” function is cancelled if the measurement value returns to being within the permissible range or if a LOWER command is issued.

NoteThe “Creeping Net Breakdown” function suppresses the “Forward High-Speed Switching” function.

This function is not suitable for operating medium-voltage networks.This is due to the fact that in the standard version (equipped with one only voltage measurement!), the Relay cannot recognise whether the change in the secondary side voltage is due to a creeping net breakdown on the primary side or a change in the load on the secondary side. Changes in the load on the secondary side must, of course, be immediately rectified.

In general, this function can only be reliably achieved by implementing an additional voltage measurement on the primary side.In this manner, the Relay can decide even in medium-voltage networks whether the fault is on the primary or the secondary side. This requires an additional program which can be ordered from our company headquarters as needed.

From firmware version 2.04 onwards a regulative procedure is possible in which the secondary side of the transformer is regulated whilst deriving the “creeping net breakdown” information from the primary side only (since it is equipped with two voltage transformers (M+)).

If you are interested in this, please contact our headquarters.

Page 244: ba_reg_d_gb

244

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

16.6.4 Add-On: monitoring the “maximum tap-change difference”

ParrErr stands for a faulty parallel operation in general (parallel error) and automatically switches a group of transformers operating in parallel from the AUTOMATIC operation mode to the MANUAL operation mode.

ParrErr is triggered when a tap difference occurs between two transformers operating in parallel which is larger than the specified permissible difference.

An alternative procedure can be specified if this behaviour is not desired. Otherwise only the Relay that carried out the tap-change that lead to the permissible maximum tap difference being exceed will be switched over to the MANUAL operation mode.

NoteIf you prefer this behaviour, please contact our company headquarters.

16.6.5 Add-On: monitoring the tap-changerAfter receiving the control command, the Relay controls the correct switching of the tap-changer by detecting the tap-change signal (tap-changer in operation) sent back by the tap-changer and then compares this value with the maximum tap-change in operation time which was previously set via the menu (Setup 5, Add-On 1).

If the tap-change signal continues to be output for a longer period of time, it is possible that the tap-changer has an error. The tap-change operation can be interrupted using a freely programmable output R 3, R 4, R 5, R 7 ... R10.

Page 245: ba_reg_d_gb

245

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

16.7 Time behaviour of the Relay when a control command is output

RequirementsThe optimal time behaviour of the Relay can be achieved through the maximum voltage constancy parameter at the minimum number of tap-changes. Moreover, large regulative deviations should be rectified faster than small regulative deviations.

There are two options for complying with the requirements specified above:

➪ The regulative deviations are summed up to a specified integral value before the Relay outputs a control command. If the line voltage dips into the tolerance band (± Xwz) before this integral value is reached, the integrator will be set to zero.

➪ The regulative deviations are constantly evaluated before the integration by means of a selected function (defined as Xwb). Depending on the selected function, the evaluation factor is increased either linearly or non-linearly according to the amount of the regulative deviation. Therefore, large regulative deviations (voltage deviations) are rectified faster than small ones. Large deviations in the voltage from the command variable trigger a control command after a short period of time (the integral value is reached quickly), whereas small voltage deviations take longer to trigger a control command.

Basic time and time factorThe evaluation factor variable of the regulative deviation Xw is not indicated directly, rather it is indicated as the time tg in seconds which passes from the beginning of the integration to the triggering of a control command provided that the regulative deviation is constant. Thus, the relationship between the regulative deviation and the reaction time can be recognised immediately.

If, for operational reasons, a slower reaction of the Relay is desired, the time tg may be increased by multiplying it with the time factor FZ

(0.1 ... 30).

Page 246: ba_reg_d_gb

246

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

The time interval that elapses between the signalling of a control command and the actual triggering of a control command is in part determined by the switching time delay.

Time behaviour of the RelayThe switching time delay tv is thus dependent on the present value of the regulative deviation Xw, the selected characteristic line Xw/tg and the entered value of the time factor Ft, for a set permissible regulative deviation Xwz.

Since the permissible regulative deviation applies for both positive as well as for negative regulative deviations, only the positive side of the regulative deviation is usually depicted.

tv = tb · Ft

1%1%

Dead-

Reaction time tv

Per

mis

sibl

e re

gula

tive

Set

poin

t val

ue

Per

mis

sibl

e re

gula

tive

Present positiveregulative deviation

2%

3%

2%

3%

Present negativeregulative deviation

band

devi

atio

n

devi

atio

n

Page 247: ba_reg_d_gb

247

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

16.7.1 Determining the reaction delay tv

Hyperbolic characteristic curve Xw/tg (setting the time behaviour: ΔU*t=const)

In the example, if the regulative deviation Xw is constant, the following applies for tv until a control command is triggered:

Time factor = 1Set regulative deviation = 1%Present regulative deviation = 2%

➪ Time until tap-change: 15 s

NotePlease note that the actual switching time delay can exceed the parameterised switching time delay by up to 2 seconds. This difference is due to the procedure selected for determining the measured values.

Reaction time tg [sec]

30

25

20

15

10

5

00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10Present regulative deviation ΔUW [%]

Set permissible regulative deviation

Page 248: ba_reg_d_gb

248

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Hyperbolic characteristic curve Xw/tg (setting the time behaviour: REG-5A/E)

In the example, if the regulative deviation Xw is constant, the following applies for tv until a control command is triggered:

Time factor = 1Set regulative deviation = 1%Present regulative deviation = 2%

➪ Time until tap-change: 10 s

NotePlease note that the actual switching time delay can exceed the parameterised switching time delay by up to 2 seconds. This difference is due to the procedure selected for determining the measured values.

Example:

The permissible regulative deviation is set to Xwz = ± 2%, the time factor is set to 5. From the set of curves, the curve for Xwz = ± 2% has been selected. Using the curve, one obtains the following values in the table:

Reaction time tg [sec]

30

25

20

15

10

5

00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10Present regulative deviation ΔUW [%]

Set permissible regulative deviation

Xw [%] = [(X - W)/W] 100% 2% 3% 4% 5% 10%

Basic time tg (s) from the curve 30 s 16 s 10 s 7 s 2 s

Switching time delay= basic time ⋅ time factor

5 ⋅ 30 s = 150 s

5 ⋅ 16 s = 80 s

5 ⋅ 10 s = 50 s

5 ⋅ 7 s = 35 s

5 ⋅ 2 s = 10 s

Page 249: ba_reg_d_gb

249

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

How to proceed: Determine the point of intersection of the Y-coordinate at Xw with the curve of the permissible regulative deviation set on the Relay. The value of the Y-coordinate corresponds to the basic time (see graphic).

Linear characteristic line Xw/tg (setting the time behaviour: linear)

In the example, if the regulative deviation Xw is constant, the following applies for tv until a control command is triggered:

Set regulative deviation = 2%Present regulative deviation = 4%

➪ Time until tap-change: 24 s

NotePlease note that the actual switching time delay can exceed the parameterised switching time delay by up to 2 seconds. This difference is due to the procedure selected for determining the measured values.

Reaction time tg [sec]

30

25

20

15

10

5

00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10Present regulative deviation ΔUW [%]

Set permissible regulative deviation

Page 250: ba_reg_d_gb

250

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

16.7.2 Integrated time programBoth the “delta U * t = const” and “REG- 5A/E” time programs function in the following manner: after the integral of the sum of the voltage deviation ΔU and the time “t” has reached a specified value, a tap-change operation is carried out and after this the integrator is reset to zero.

If the voltage leaves the voltage band directly after a regulating procedure, the Relay waits for the time specified in the algorithm (time from the characteristic curve multiplied with the time factor) before it initiates another control procedure.

Considering a bucket that is asymmetrically hung is helpful for understanding the two integrating procedures.

Picture 1 Picture 2Memory is filled with a Memory is filled with asmall regulative deviation large regulative deviation

The bucket tips when it is filled and this is analogous to a step-change operation carried out by the Relay.

The analogy can be interpreted as follows:The greater the amount of water that flows into the bucket per unit time (the larger the voltage deviation), the quicker the bucket will fill up and tip over (the Relay carries out a tap-change).

The smaller the amount of water that flows into the pail per unit of time (the smaller the voltage deviation), the longer it takes for the bucket to fill up and tip over (the Relay carries out a tap-change).

The volume of water flowing (e.g. m3/unit time) corresponds to the voltage deviation.

Page 251: ba_reg_d_gb

251

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

This algorithm is based on the operating experience that small regulative deviations do not need to be rectified immediately, since in general they do not lead to a fault in the operation and also they can often “heal” themselves due to changes to the load (voltage returns to being within the bandwidth again).

The setpoint value and bandwidth boundaries are generally parameterised such that the voltage lies in the middle of the tolerance band.

In situations in which the voltage has changed such that it still lies within the band but close to the limit due to a particular load situation or a change to the primary voltage, small changes in the voltage or the load will always lead to a band violation.

However, since small regulative deviations are accompanied by a long integration or reaction time (it takes a long time for the bucket to fill), the voltage spends a large part of a particular amount of time outside the permissible band.

In such cases, specific intervention of the Relay is desired.

16.7.3 Trend memoryThe “Trend memory” parameter can be used to accelerate all the algorithms.

It functions as follows:If the voltage leaves the tolerance band, the integration process is initiated − the bucket is filled. The Relay performs a tap-change operation after a certain time has elapsed, which is determined by various parameters (the entered permissible regulative deviation, the actual regulative deviation, time factor).

If the voltage returns to the bandwidth without the Relay having issued a tap-change command, the integrator is only reset to zero after the time that is parameterised for the trend memory has elapsed and not immediately.

However, if the voltage leaves the tolerance band again a short time later, the tap-change command will tend to be issued earlier because the integrator was not “emptied” and so will become full quicker.

However, once a tap-changing command is issued, the memory is set back to zero.

Therefore by using the “trend memory” parameter it can be achieved that the integrator is not immediately reset to zero if the voltage returns to being within the permissible tolerance band. If the voltage leaves the bandwidth at a point in time at

Page 252: ba_reg_d_gb

252

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

which the memory has not been completely emptied, the Relay can react earlier, since the integration procedure or “filling” procedure doesn’t start from zero, but rather at a higher level.

In general: The time, which is derived from the selected time program, is crucial to the memory loading process which triggers a tap-change operation when the memory is 100% full. However, the emptying of the memory is dependent on the time that is specified as the trend memory time.

NoteFor the delta U * t = const and REG 5A/E time programs, the time to be entered for loading of the memory can be derived from the appropriate curves. For the “Const” time program use time T1 (see page 252).

NoteThe function of the trend memory is explained using an example at the end of this section.

A progress bar is incorporated in the Relay screen so that the present trend memory level can be judged by the user.

The progress bar is displayed as a black bar at the bottom of the screen. The bar is black when the memory is filling (i.e. the voltage lies outside of the tolerance band), and when it is emptying it changes colour and become lighter.

A tap-change operation is carried out when the bar reaches the right hand side of the screen. If the bar is invisible, this means that the trend memory has been completely emptied.

16.7.4 “Const” time program“Const” stands for constant reaction times, which cannot sensitively be adjusted to the respective regulative deviations, as isthe case for the “delta U * t = const” or “REG- 5A/E” procedures.

In these programs, two differing times are specified, which cause the Relay to perform a tap-change operation dependent on the extent of the regulative deviation.

Page 253: ba_reg_d_gb

253

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Time T1 is effective if the voltage has a value that lies outside of the voltage band, but which can be brought back within the band with a single tap-change operation. T2 is valid when larger deviations have to be rectified.

The limit above which T2 is valid is therefore the same as the specified permissible regulative deviation.

Example:Permissible regulative deviation is 2%Actual regulative deviation is 3%T1 = 10 s, T2 = 3 s

➪ The Relay uses the time T1

Setpoint 100%

4%

3%

2%

-2%

-4%

10 s

T2

T1

T1

T2

U

Page 254: ba_reg_d_gb

254

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Permissible regulative deviation is 2%Actual regulative deviation is 5%T1 = 10 s, T2 = 3 s

➪ The Relay uses the time T2

One advantage of this procedure is that in the case of regulative deviations which are larger than one tap-change, the operator can easily see when the next tap-change command will be issued.

A disadvantage compared to the other procedures is that over a long period of time the number of tap-changes will probably be larger than would be the case for the “ΔU * t = const.” and “REG 5A/E” regulation algortihms.

As a general settings recommendation, the time T2 should be shorter than time T1 since large regulative deviations should be rectified more quickly than small ones.

Of course, the absolute values of the times in this case also depend on the specific conditions at the respective feeding point (load structure and behaviour etc.).

Sensible values for the trend memory can also only be derived from practical experience.

Setpoint 100%

4%

3%

2%

-2%

-4%

10 s

T2

T1

T1

T2

U

3 s

Page 255: ba_reg_d_gb

255

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

The “Const” time program and the way the trend memory operates should be explained using an example.

Parameters:

Time program: Const

T1: 40 seconds

Trend memory: 20 seconds

" � ; � ' * �

��

5 <

=

$ <

* : �

* : '

* : -

* :

: *

* � * ) * ' *

� � � � � �

��

� �

* � * ) * ' *

��

� � � � � �

* , * - *

* : �

* : '

* : -

* :

: *

* � * ) * ' *

��

" *, * - * . *

* � * ) * ' *

� � � � � �

* , *

��

- *

� � � � � � � � �� � � �� � � �� � � � � � � �

� � � � � � � � � � �� � � � � � � � �

� � � �

� � � � �

� � � �

� � � � �

� � � � �

� � � � �

. *

� � � � � � � � �� � � �� � � �� � � � � � � �

Integrator T1 (with trend memory)

Integrator T1 (without trend memory)

Tap-changes

Raise

Lower

Tap-changes

Raise

Lower

Tap-change position

Tap-change position

Set tolerance band

Page 256: ba_reg_d_gb

256

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

The entire situation is illustrated in five diagrams.Diagram 1 shows the progression of the voltage with time.

The voltage leaves the tolerance band at time T0 and returns again 20 seconds later.

After a further 10 seconds, the voltage leaves the permissible tolerance band again, and after 30 seconds a “lower” tap-change is issued by the Relay which returns the value to within the band.

Diagram 2 shows how full the trend memory is (fill level). The Relay performs a tap-change if the fill level reaches the normalised value “1”. If, on the other hand, the graph reaches the x-axis, the memory is completely emptied.

Diagram 3 shows the sequence of control commands which are issued by the Relay when voltage deviations occur.

Diagrams 4 und 5 show the behaviour that occurs without the trend memory.

After 20 seconds the integrator for T1 is reset to zero, and after 30 seconds it begins to fill again − starting from zero.

A further 40 seconds (T1) are required to fill the memory to a level where a tap-change command is issued.

The way the trend memory operates can be best illustrated using diagram 2.

In order to explain the individual steps more clearly, the diagram has been divided into three sections, i, ii and iii.

Section i: The voltage is outside the voltage band, the integrator for time T1 is running.

If the voltage were to remain outside the tolerance band for 40 seconds, the Relay would issue a control command. However, since the voltage returns to being within the tolerance band after 20 seconds, the regulation procedure is surpressed.

Section ii: The integrator for time T1 is half full (50% or 20 seconds in total). Emptying now begins according to the time that has been entered for the trend memory (100% = > 20 seconds).

Section iii: The voltage only remains inside the permissible tolerance band for 10 seconds and then exceeds the allowed voltage range again.

Page 257: ba_reg_d_gb

257

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

During this time the integrator could only be reduced from 50% to 25% full (20 seconds to 10 seconds). If the voltage now remains outside the band for a further 30 seconds the Relay will issue a tap-change command.

For the voltage progression described in the example the time before the Relay intervenes is reduced from 70 seconds to 60 seconds by employing the trend memory (refer also to diagrams 4 and 5).

16.7.5 Setting the time factor Ft

For a normal 24 hour load curve, an empirical value between 2 and 3 is suitable for the time factor. If the 24-hour load curve is more constant, the rectification process can be accelerated by choosing a smaller time factor.

Page 258: ba_reg_d_gb

258

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

16.8 E-LAN (Energy Local Area Network)Each bus station (REG-D) has two E-LAN interfaces each. So-called line-to-line operation is enabled through these interfaces. In this operation mode, each Relay works as a bus station and, at the same time, as a bus repeater which regenerates distorted rectangular forms and which increases the output level to the setpoint value. Up to 255 bus stations can be connected to the E-LAN.All bus stations can thus communicate with each other or be centrally controlled (see WinREG operating manual for selection and details).

Features❑ 255 bus stations can be addressed

❑ Multimaster structure

❑ Integrated repeater function

❑ Open ring, bus or combination of bus and ring

❑ Record based on SDLC/HDLC frames

❑ Transmission rate 15.6 ... 325 kbits/s

❑ Telegram length 10 ... 30 bytes

❑ Average throughput approx. 100 telegrams/s

For technical data and the pin assignment, please refer to page 33.

For information on the Configuration, see “E-LAN (Energy-Local Area Network)” on page 96.

������������ �����

�� ���������������������������������� ������������������������������ ������������������������ ����������� � ������� � ��������������� ��������������������� !

������

�����

���

�����

���

��

������

�����

���

�� �

�����

���

������������

"����

�����

������

�����

������

��� �������

�����

�� �

�� �����

�� ��

��

�����

�����

���

������� a. eberle gmbh

��������

Status

< U1

> U2

> I

>> U3

>> U4

Auslösung

Störung

StörungRegler

Stufenschalter

Leitungsschalter

Rückführung

Lauflampe

läuft

���

������� a. eberle gmbh

��������

Status

< U1

> U2

> I

>> U3

>> U4

Auslösung

Störung

StörungRegler

Stufenschalter

Leitungsschalter

Rückführung

Lauflampe

läuft

������� �����

��

��

��

��

�����

����

���

���

������� a. eberle gmbh

������� �����

��

��

��

��

�����

����

���

���

������� a. eberle gmbh

������� �����

�����

����

���

���

��

��

��

��

������� a. eberle gmbh

������� �����

��

��

��

��

�����

����

���

���

������� a. eberle gmbh

�����

������������ ������������

�����

�!��"�# ��!�!��

Regulator Mode AUTO

1. Setpoint 100.0 % 16.5 kVAct.Value 16.8 kVmax. deviation 2.0 %

Tap-Changer Pos 0

-10 % 0 +10 %

�!��"�# ��!�!��

Regulator Mode AUTO

1. Setpoint 100.0 % 16.5 kVAct.Value 16.8 kVmax. deviation 2.0 %

Tap-Changer Pos 0

-10 % 0 +10 %

�!��"�# ��!�!��

Regulator Mode AUTO

1. Setpoint 100.0 % 16.5 kVAct.Value 16.8 kVmax. deviation 2.0 %

Tap-Changer Pos 0

-10 % 0 +10 %

�!��"�# ��!�!��

Regulator Mode AUTO

1. Setpoint 100.0 % 16.5 kVAct.Value 16.8 kVmax. deviation 2.0 %

Tap-Changer Pos 0

-10 % 0 +10 %

Page 259: ba_reg_d_gb

259

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

�#

REG - D

���

a. eberle gmbh

AUTO MENUESC

��

��

��

��

Status

< U

> U

> I

REG - D

���

a. eberle gmbh

AUTO MENUESC

��

��

��

��

Status

< U

> U

> I

REG - D

���

a. eberle gmbh

AUTO MENUESC

��

��

��

��

Status

< U

> U

> I

$�%��������������

��%��������������

��%�������

������$%�%& ������'(��"��

��"��

��"��

��"��

��"��

��"��

��"��

&'(�)

REG - D

���

a. eberle gmbh

AUTO MENUESC

��

��

��

��

Status

< U

> U

> I

�!��"�� ��!�!��

Regulator Mode AUTO

1. Setpoint 100.0 % 16.5 kVAct.Value 16.8 kVmax. deviation 2.0 %

Tap-Changer Pos 0

-10 % 0 +10 %

&'(�)

&'(�)

&'(�� &'(�)

&'(�)

&'(�)

&'(�)

REG - D

���

a. eberle gmbh

AUTO MENUESC

��

��

��

��

Status

< U

> U

> I

REG - D

���

a. eberle gmbh

AUTO MENUESC

��

��

��

��

Status

< U

> U

> I

REG - D

���

a. eberle gmbh

AUTO MENUESC

��

��

��

��

Status

< U

> U

> I

�*

+#+*+,-

+,�

�#

�*

�,-

�,�

+#+*

�#

�*

+#+*

�#

�*

�#

�*

+#+*

+#+*&'(��

&'(��

&'(��

&'(��

&'(��

&'(��

����%�����������������.�����������������/����)($*��&������

��%��������������

�!��"�� ��!�!��

Regulator Mode AUTO

1. Setpoint 100.0 % 16.5 kVAct.Value 16.8 kVmax. deviation 2.0 %

Tap-Changer Pos 0

-10 % 0 +10 %

�!��"�� ��!�!��

Regulator Mode AUTO

1. Setpoint 100.0 % 16.5 kVAct.Value 16.8 kVmax. deviation 2.0 %

Tap-Changer Pos 0

-10 % 0 +10 %

�!��"�� ��!�!��

Regulator Mode AUTO

1. Setpoint 100.0 % 16.5 kVAct.Value 16.8 kVmax. deviation 2.0 %

Tap-Changer Pos 0

-10 % 0 +10 %

�!��"�� ��!�!��

Regulator Mode AUTO

1. Setpoint 100.0 % 16.5 kVAct.Value 16.8 kVmax. deviation 2.0 %

Tap-Changer Pos 0

-10 % 0 +10 %

�!��"�� ��!�!��

Regulator Mode AUTO

1. Setpoint 100.0 % 16.5 kVAct.Value 16.8 kVmax. deviation 2.0 %

Tap-Changer Pos 0

-10 % 0 +10 %

�!��"�� ��!�!��

Regulator Mode AUTO

1. Setpoint 100.0 % 16.5 kVAct.Value 16.8 kVmax. deviation 2.0 %

Tap-Changer Pos 0

-10 % 0 +10 %

NoteAll of the devices in the REGSys™ computer family can be connected to the bus.REGSys™ components can be identified by the D after the hyphen.Example: REG-D, PQI-D, EOR-D, REG-DP, REG-DM, ...

Page 260: ba_reg_d_gb

260

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Types of linesEach of the E-LAN interfaces of a bus station can operate on a 2-wire line or on a 4-wire line (RS485). A 2-wire line is usually selected because this is the only option which permits a bus configuration with several bus stations on the same bus line.

The transmission line must be connected with a 100 Ω resistor at its beginning and end. Reflections can occur if the terminating resistance is not present. These distort the signal, increase the line damping and thus reduce the maximum transmission distance of the line.

The terminating resistor is already integrated into the REG-D and may be switched on and off via the operating panel (termination).

TopologyThe topology of the network, i.e. the connection of each bus station to the bus, may be freely selected and combined.

The maximum permissible line length in the E-LAN is determined by the transmission rate and by the line data. In the RS485, the length is normally ≤ 1.2 km with a transmission rate of 62.5 kBaud.

Only a 4-wire line can be used if a booster (same function as a bus repeater) is installed to increase the permissible line length (1.2 km). The necessary terminating resistors will then be activated automatically (it is no longer necessary to select termination).

Bus segmentUp to 16 bus devices can be connected to one bus station (a line without boosters between the first and last device).

Up to 32 bus stations can be connected to one bus segment if all of the spur-line connections are as short as possible and the total loop resistance of the transmission line is < 100 Ohms.

Multimaster structureThe E-LAN has a multimaster structure, i.e. any bus station may be declared to be the bus master.

Page 261: ba_reg_d_gb

261

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Each Relay on the bus works completely independently within E-LAN and has access to all of the data of the other bus stations.

Unique addressingEach bus station on the E-LAN must be assigned a unique address. 255 different, freely selectable addresses are possible.

An address has the form: A, A1 ... A9, B, B1 ... B9, Z, Z1 ... Z4

Bus station indexEach bus station automatically generates an internal index of all bus stations with valid addresses in the E-LAN.

Every three seconds, each bus station in the E-LAN sends a so-called broadcast message to all of the other bus subscribers so that the latter can adapt their internal index accordingly.

If the broadcast message of a bus station is interrupted for more than 20 seconds, the other bus stations will delete the corresponding bus station from their internal index. A list of all bus stations can be loaded via the operating panel.

The background program can be used to specify that the omission of a bus station is indicated via a signal (relay, LED) or a text message on the display.

Page 262: ba_reg_d_gb

262

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

16.9 Voltage regulation with parallel-switched transformers

If parallel-switched transformers do not have same data (EMK, uk, switching group), an additional current (reactive circulating current) will permanently flow within this parallel-switching circuit. This circulating current generates losses and is independent of the load current and must therefore be avoided.

Regulation criteriaIn the case of parallel-switching on a busbar, the terminal voltage of all of the transformers – even with different tap-change positions - is compulsorily set to the same amount. This is why the voltage alone cannot be a regulation criteria for transformers with different parameters. To be able to control transformers switched in parallel on a busbar to the correspondingly required voltage and to the same tap-change position, the voltage regulation must be supplemented by a circulating current regulation.

If all the transformers are the same, then stable parallel-switching can be achieved using the voltage and tap-changes (master-slave, MSI).

Command variableThe REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring regulate the voltage on the undervoltage side (on the measuring transformer) of each transformer to a common command variable which depends on the sum current of the transformers switched in parallel. It is assumed that the network is usually loaded symmetrically, i.e. that the current intensity in each one of the three phases is approximately the same.

Sum current (only relevant in the event of current influence)All the transformer currents can be summed in one Relay by crosslinking the REG-D Relays for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring of all the parallel-switched transformers using one bus. This sum current and the selected gradient of the Uf/IL characteristic line is the uniform base for the current-dependent influence of the command variable W for all Relays.

Due to the use of a normalised sum current, the gradient of the Uf/IL characteristic can be set independently of the number and

Page 263: ba_reg_d_gb

263

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

different types of characteristic data of the parallel-transformers (nominal power, short circuit voltage), so that changes in these parameters do not require resetting the gradient Gnom.

16.9.1 Regulation programsfor transformers switched in parallel

The following procedures are available:

➪ ΔI sin ϕ − procedure(minimisation of the reactive circulating current Icirc sin ϕ)

➪ ΔI sin ϕ (S) − procedure(minimisation of the reactive circulating current Icirc sin ϕ with different transformers))

➪ Master-slave procedure (forced parallel operation, same tap-change position)

➪ Δcos ϕ − procedure(minimisation of the reactive circulating current Icirc sin ϕ for transformers that cannot communicate using E-LAN)

➪ MSI - Master Slave Independent − procedure

ParametersParameters determine the extent to which the parallel regulation programs may affect regulation.

Different parameter menus are available depending on the type of regulation program selected for the parallel-switching of the transformers.

➪ Influence of the circulating current regulation

➪ Limitation of the influence of the circulating current regulation

➪ Setpoint value of the cos ϕ of the network (cos ϕset)

➪ Nominal power of the transformer

➪ Transformer group list (addresses of Relays controlling transformers operating in parallel on a busbar. These can be activated via the menu or via a binary signal)

Page 264: ba_reg_d_gb

264

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

16.9.2 Functional principle

Minimisation of the reactive circulating currentThe reactive component (Icirc sin ϕ) of the circulating current should ideally be zero or at least be minimised. Since the voltage cannot be changed continuously (tap-changes occur in increments), it is generally not possible to achieve the condition Icirc sin ϕ = 0.

To minimise the reactive component of the circulating current, each Relay measures the reactive component I sin ϕ of the load currents for each transformer of the group list, calculates the reactive circulating current Icirc sin ϕ of the assigned transformer and thus sets the tap-changer position in such a way that this reactive circulating current is minimised.

16.9.3 Influence of the circulating current regulationThe size of the voltage change depends on the “influence of the circulating current regulation” parameters as well as on their degree of limitation. Larger permissible circulating currents (i.e. influence of circulating current regulation is lower) cause the precision of the circulating current regulation to be lowered which could result in tap-change differences of more than one tap-change.

Limitation of the influence of the circulating current regulationUnder normal operating conditions, the voltage regulation and the circulating current regulation are independent of each other (the limitation value of the influence of the circulating current regulation lies far above the normal operation value). Only under extreme conditions, including:

➪ Parallel-switching operations of transformers with previously different tap-change positions

➪ Manual change of the tap-change position

➪ Δcos ϕ-regulation for cos ϕnet ≠ cos ϕset

can be regulated to achieve either optimal voltage stability or optimal minimisation of the reactive circulating current. The user chooses his/her priority by setting the respective parameters.

This means that if voltage regulation is to be given priority over circulating current regulation, the influence of the circulating

Page 265: ba_reg_d_gb

265

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

current regulation can be limited to a minimum value which must nevertheless be higher than zero.

16.9.4 Activation of the regulation programBoth the regulation program selected via the menu, and the addresses of the transformers/Relays specified for parallel-switching are stored in a “group list” (SETUP 1, programs..., Par. parameters...). The parallel-switching operation and its reset are activated via a freely selectable binary input (SETUP 5, Add-On 6).

The corresponding activation may be carried out via a pulse or a high-level permanent signal.

A self-learning regulation program (Paragramer) is also available through which the Relays on the E-LAN permanently check which transformers are feeding on which busbar. The transformer group list is constantly updated in accordance with these results.

The ParProg parameter can be used to determine if a parallel program is active or not and can be assigned to a freely programmable LED or relay. An error in the regulation program is indicated with ParErr or TapErr.

Further information can be found in chapter 9.

Page 266: ba_reg_d_gb

266

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

16.9.5 Description of the regulation programs

The ΔI sin ϕ procedureFunctional principle:

The value of the reactive current should be the same value, IbA = IbB = IbC = ... , for each of the parallel-switched transformers A, B, C,... .

Area of application:

Parallel operation on a busbar with a maximum of 10 transformers with nearly equal nominal power, nearly equal short circuit voltage and the same switching group. The tap-change increments may differ and the cos ϕ in the network can take any values requested.

Prerequisites:

The short circuit voltages, Uk of the parallel-switched transformers should only differ by a small amount: 0.90 uk1 < uk2 < 1.10 uk1. The nominal powers should be approximately equal.

The ΔI sin ϕ [S] program is available when transformers with different nominal powers are used.

Parameters to be entered:

➪ Permissible circulating current (depends on the change in the reactive circulating current ΔIcirc sin ϕ = Ib** - Ib* per tap-change of the assigned transformer)

➪ Transformer group list (addresses of Relays, which can be activated via the menu or via a binary signal, that control parallel-switched transformers on a busbar)

➪ Maximum tap difference between the transformers(SETUP 5, Add-On 6)

Page 267: ba_reg_d_gb

267

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Permissible Icirc:

The correct value is derived as follows:

➪ Set all of the transformers in the group list to the same tap-changer position (operation mode MANUAL) that causes approx. the same terminal voltage. Then record the value of reactive current (Ib = Isin ϕ = reactive component of load curent)(Transducer mode). The value of the reactive current must be approximately the same in all of the other transformers.

➪ Change each transformer successively by one tap-change position.

➪ The reactive current changes. The difference between the new value (Ib** = 2nd measured value) and the old value (Ib* = 1st measured value) is considered to be the 1st approximation to the “perm. Icirc”.

Since the Relay is supposed to reset the transformer that was changed by one level back to the previous tap-changer position, the permissible circulating current (perm. Icirc) must be set to a slightly lower value than the value found in the 1st approximation. i.e.: permissible Icirc > 0.6 (Ib** - Ib*).

Low values can produce oscillations in the regulation, in particular when the transformers have different tap-changer increments or different short circuit voltages.

ParErrParrErr stands for a faulty parallel operation in general (parallel error) and automatically switches a group of transformers operating in parallel from the AUTOMATIC operation mode to the MANUAL operation mode.

To prevent the transformers from “diverging”, a max. tap difference (SETUP 5, Add-On 6) can be entered that is monitored in turn by the error flag “ParErr”.

If the set max. tap-change deviation is exceeded, the ParErr error flag is set and the parallel-switching operation is switched to the MANUAL operation mode − providing that Sysctrl Bit 6 has been set.

Page 268: ba_reg_d_gb

268

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

NoteBit 6 has been set on delivery!

Although the tap-change positions are not required for parallel-switching according to the ΔI sinϕ, ΔI sinϕ (S) und Δcosϕ current-dependent procedures, the functioning of the tap-changer can nevertheless be monitored if required.

Information on the tap-changer is not mandatory for operating a parallel-switching operation (as mentioned above), because the regulation only derives the regulation commands from the current and the voltage (value and angle) and not from the tap-change position of the transformer.

TapErrThe TapErr error flag signals errors in the transmission of the tap-change position or errors in the coding/decoding of the tap-changer. In theΔsinϕ procedure, TapErr is only locally effective, i.e. it only affects the Relay where the tap error has occurred.

We recommend assigning the error bit TapErr to a LED and/or a relay to inform the operating personnel about the status of the position return signal, making it easier to rectify the error.

If a transformer is operating in parallel, the TapErr error flag is set when - after a tap-change - the logically expected tap-changer position is not established within 1.5 x running time of the tap-changer.

In general, every Relay expects the logically next step that follows a tap-change increment. If the reaction of the system is illogical, TapErr will be activated.

The following are considered to be tap errors:1. Tap-changes in the wrong direction

Example: The Relay outputs a “raise” command and the transformer reacts with a lower tap-change or the Relay outputs a “lower” command and the transformer reacts with a higher tap-change.

Page 269: ba_reg_d_gb

269

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Possible causes of the error: The raise and lower signals have been confused or the motor drive is behaving inversely.

Inverse behaviour implies that the Relay increases the ratio in the event of a higher tap-change, thus lowering the voltage.

In most cases, it is to be expected that an increase in the tap-change position results in a higher voltage, whereas a decrease in the tap-change position results in a lower voltage.

Remedy: Exchange the raise and lower signals

2. No tap-change

Example:The Relay outputs a command, but the tap-change position does not change.

In this case, it must be assumed that either the position confirmation signal or the motor drive is defective.

3. Illogical tap-changes

If no signal is received from the next higher or next lower tap position after a raise or lower command is issued, the Relay interprets this as a fault in the tap-change signal and the TapErr flag is set.

Tap limitationIf the tap is to be limited from either above or below, please enter the following background program lines via the WinREG terminal program:

H 7=‘RegStufe-,Lower tap limitation,<=,if,RegSperreT =3,else,RegSperreT =0’

H 8=‘RegStufe-,Upper tap limitation,>=,if,RegSperreH =3,else,RegSperreH =0’

Page 270: ba_reg_d_gb

270

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

In place of the “Upper tap limitation“, enter the required upper tap limitation and in place of the “Lower tap limitation” enter the required lower tap limitation.

NoteThe assignment of program lines H7 and H8 is arbitrary, and you can use any two program lines of your choice.

The ΔI sin ϕ (S) procedureFunctional principle:

The relationship between the value of the reactive current and the nominal power should be the same value IbA/SnA = IbB/SnB = IbC/SnC = ... for each of the transformers A, B, C,... operated in parallel!

Area of application:

Transformers with different nominal powers which feed via one busbar in the network. Both the switching group as well as the short circuit voltages of the transformers should be as equal as possible because deviations may cause a different load utilisation of the transformers.

Preconditions:

The permissible limits for different short circuit voltages are as follows: 0.90 uk1 < uk2 < 1.10 uk1

Parameters to be entered:

➪ Permissible circulating current (depends on the change in the reactive circulating current ΔIcirc sin ϕ = Ib** - Ib* per tap-change of the assigned transformer; lb* = 1st measured value, lb** = 2nd measured value). In the case of transformers switched in parallel that have different nominal powers, it is necessary to measure the permissible circulating current for each transformer separately and to enter it in the Relay.

➪ Nominal power of the connected transformer.

Page 271: ba_reg_d_gb

271

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

➪ Transformer group list (addresses of Relays, which can be activated via the PARAGRAMER menu or via a binary signal, that control parallel-switched transformers on a busbar)

➪ Maximum tap difference between the transformers(SETUP 5, Add-On 6)

Permissible Icirc:

The correct value is derived as follows:

➪ Set all the transformers in the group list to the same tap-change position that causes approximately the same terminal voltage (MANUAL operation mode), and record the value of the reactive current Ib. The value of the reactive current must be approximately the same for all the transformers (see transducer mode).

➪ Change each transformer successively by one tap-change position.

➪ The reactive current Ib changes. The difference between the new value (Ib** = 2nd measured value) and the old value (Ib* = 1st measured value) is considered to be the 1st approximation to Icirc.

Since the Relay is supposed to then reset the transformer to the previous tap-change position, the permissible circulating current (permissible Icirc) must be set to the following value.

i.e.: permissible Icirc > 0.6 (lb** - lb*).

Low values might produce oscillations, in particular when the transformers have different tap-change increments or different short circuit voltages.

ParErrParrErr stands for a faulty parallel operation in general (parallel error) and automatically switches a group of transformers operating in parallel from the AUTOMATIC operation mode to the MANUAL operation mode.

Page 272: ba_reg_d_gb

272

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

To prevent the transformers from “diverging”, a max. tap difference (SETUP 5, Add-On 6) can be entered that is monitored in turn by the error flag “ParErr”.

If the set max. tap-change deviation is exceeded, the ParErr error flag is set and the parallel-switching operation is switched to the MANUAL operation mode − providing that Sysctrl Bit 6 has been set.

NoteBit 6 has been set on delivery!

Although the tap-change positions are not required for parallel-switching according to the ΔI sinϕ, ΔI sinϕ (S) and Δcosϕ current-dependent procedures, the functioning of the tap-change can nevertheless be monitored if required.

Information on the tap-changer is not mandatory for operating a parallel-switching operation (as mentioned above), because the regulation only derives the regulation commands from the current and the voltage (value and angle) and not from the tap-change position of the transformer.

TapErrThe error flag TapErr signals errors in the transmission of the tap-change position or errors in the coding/decoding of the tap-changer. In theΔsinϕ procedure, TapErr is only locally effective, i.e. it only affects the Relay where the tap error has occurred.

We recommend assigning the error bit TapErr to a LED and/or a relay to inform the operating personnel about the status of the position return signal, making it easier to rectify the error.

If a transformer is operating in parallel, the TapErr error flag is set when - after a tap-change - the logically expected tap-change position is not established within 1.5 x running time of the tap-change.

In general, every Relay expects the logically next step that follows a tap-change increment. If the reaction of the system is illogical, TapErr will be activated.

Page 273: ba_reg_d_gb

273

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

The following are considered to be tap errors:1. Tap-changes in the wrong direction

Example: The Relay outputs a “raise” command and the transformer reacts with a lower tap-change or the Relay outputs a “lower” command and the transformer reacts with a higher tap-change.

Possible causes of the error: The raise and lower signals have been confused or the motor drive is behaving inversely.

Inverse behaviour implies that the Relay increases the ratio in the event of a higher tap-change, thus lowering the voltage.

In most cases, it is to be expected that an increase in the tap-change position results in a higher voltage, whereas a decrease in the tap-change position results in a lower voltage.

Remedy: Exchange the raise and lower signals

2. No tap-change

Example:The Relay outputs a command, but the tap-changer position does not change.

In this case, it must be assumed that either the position confirmation signal or the motor drive is defective.

3. Illogical tap-changes

If no signal is received from the next higher or next lower tap-change position after a raise or lower command is issued, the Relay interprets this as a fault in the tap-change signal and the TapErr flag is set.

Tap limitationIf the tap is to be limited from either above or below, please enter the following background program lines via the WinREG terminal program:

Page 274: ba_reg_d_gb

274

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

H 7=‘RegStufe-,Lower tap limitation,<=,if,RegSperreT =3,else,RegSperreT =0’

H 8=‘RegStufe-,Upper tap limitation,>=,if,RegSperreH =3,else,RegSperreH =0’

In place of the “Upper tap limitation“, enter the required upper tap limitation for your requirements and in place of the “Lower tap limitation” enter the required lower tap limitation.

NoteThe assignment of program lines H7 and H8 is arbitrary, and you can use any two program lines of your choice.

Master-Slave procedureThis procedure is suitable for transformers with the same nominal power, the same tap-change position and the same tap-changer increments.

After the parallel-switching operation has been activated, the master will regulate the slave, or - in the master-slave cycle - the slaves, to the tap-change position which it itself is in. It then switches to master-slave mode which causes all of the transformers involved in the parallel-switching operation to change taps simultaneously.

In the master-slave mode, the slaves do not become slaves until they have reached the same tap-change position as the master.As long as they are not in the same tap-change position, they remain in the slave mode.This differentiation and/or change can also be followed in the status line of the Relay.

The precondition for the master-slave procedure is that each Relay must be fed the present tap-change position of “its” transformer by means of a BCD, binary or mA signal.

Further prerequisites for using the MSI procedure:

Only transformer types with identical electrical (output, short circuit voltage, voltage between the tap-changer positions, switching groups, etc.) and mechanical features (number of tap-change positions, position of the deadband) are suitable for MSI operation.

Page 275: ba_reg_d_gb

275

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

A different procedure should be used if one or more of the parameters differ.

In addition, it must be ensured that each Relay receives the information regarding the tap-change position of “its” transformer.

The recording and transmission of the correct tap-change position is one of the mandatory prerequisites of the master-slave tap-change equalisation procedure.

Every potential “candidate” must be listed in the group list with its address in order to notify the system of the number of Relays/transformers that should take part in parallel operation.

Moreover, the tap-change of each Relay involved in the parallel-switching operation must be switched on (menu SETUP 5, Add-On 1, F4) before the parallel-switching operation is activated.

The MSI (master-slave-independent procedure) is a special version of the master-slave program (see “Parallel operation using the “Master-Slave-Independent (MSI)” procedure” on page 170).

Parameters to be entered:

➪ Transformer group list

➪ Selection of activation, see chapter 9.

For operating the master-slave procedure it is mandatory that the tap-change position is signalled correctly. For this reason, error flags have been developed which immediately recognise errors and then set the regulation to the MANUAL operation mode if necessary.

TapErrIn the master-slave procedure, TapErr affects the entire group.

We recommend assigning the error bit TapErr to a LED and/or a relay to inform the operating personnel about the status of the position confirmation signal making it easier to rectify the error.

If a transformer is operating in parallel, the error flag TapErr is set when - after a tap-change - the logically expected tap-changer position is not established within 1.5 x tap-changer

Page 276: ba_reg_d_gb

276

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

runtime. In this case the entire group will be switched from AUTOMATIC to MANUAL.

In general, every Relay expects the logically next step that follows a tap-change increment. If the reaction of the system is illogical, TapErr will be activated.

The following are considered to be tap errors:1. Tap-changes in the wrong direction

Example: The Relay outputs a “raise” command and the transformer reacts with a lower tap-change or the Relay outputs a “lower” command and the transformer reacts with a higher tap-change.

Possible causes of the error: The raise and lower signals have been confused or the motor drive is behaving inversely.

Inverse behaviour implies that the Relay increases the transformer ratio in the event of a higher tap-change, thus lowering the voltage.

In most cases, it is to be expected that an increase in the tap-change position results in a higher voltage, whereas a decrease in the tap-change position results in a lower voltage.

Remedy: Exchange the raise and lower signals

2. No tap-change

Example:The Relay outputs a command, but the tap-changer position does not change.

In this case, it must be assumed that either the position confirmation signal or the motor drive is defective.

3. Illogical tap-changes

If no signal is received from the next higher or next lower tap position after a raise of lower command is issued, the Relay

Page 277: ba_reg_d_gb

277

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

interprets this as a fault in the tap-change signal and the TapErr flag is set.

We recommend assigning the error bit TapErr to a LED and/or a relay to inform the operating personnel about the status of the position confirmation signal making it easier to rectify the error.

ParErrParrErr stands for a faulty parallel operation in general (parallel error) and automatically switches a group of transformers operating in parallel from the AUTOMATIC operation mode to the MANUAL operation mode.

ParrErr is triggered when a tap difference occurs between two transformers operating in parallel which is larger than the specified permissible difference.

An alternative procedure can be specified if this behaviour is not desired. Otherwise only the Relay that carried out the tap-change that lead to the permissible maximum tap difference being exceed will be switched over to the manual operation mode.

NoteIf you prefer this behaviour, please contact our company headquarters.

The Δcos ϕ procedureFunctional principle:

By means of the set cos ϕset, the ratio between the active current I cos ϕ and the reactive current I sin ϕ of the transformer (load currents) is set to the required value. Regulation is executed in such a way that the cos ϕ of the transformer is regulated to the set value cos ϕset.

The cos ϕ of the network is set on the Relay. The Relay should ideally keep this value constant. The constancy of the cos ϕnet value is the gauge of quality of the regulation. Deviations from the set value negatively affect the regulation results because there is a small voltage change when cos ϕnet ≠ cos ϕset (inequality between the current value of the cos ϕ of the network and the set cos ϕset).

Page 278: ba_reg_d_gb

278

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Area of application:

Transformers which are feeding on one network independently of each other and for which there is no bus link between the assigned Relays.

Parameters to be entered:

➪ Permissible reactive current difference > 0.6 x (lb** - lb*)

➪ Limitation of the influence of the circulating current regulation

➪ Setpoint value of the cos ϕ of the network (cos ϕset)

Although the tap-change positions are not required for parallel-switching according to the ΔI sinϕ, ΔI sinϕ (S) and Δcosϕ current-dependent procedures, the functioning of the tap-changer can nevertheless be monitored if required.

Information on the tap-changer is not mandatory for operating a parallel-switching operation (as mentioned above), because the regulation only derives the regulation commands from the current and the voltage (value and angle) and not from the tap-change position of the transformer.

TapErrTapErr is only effective locally, that is it only affects the Relay where the tap error has occurred.

We recommend assigning the error bit TapErr to a LED and/or a relay to inform the operating personnel about the status of the position confirmation signal making it easier to rectify the error.

In general, every Relay expects the logically next step that follows a tap-change increment. If the reaction of the system is illogical, TapErr will be activated.

Page 279: ba_reg_d_gb

279

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

The following are considered to be tap errors:1. Tap-changes in the wrong direction

Example: The Relay outputs a “raise” command and the transformer reacts with a lower tap-change or the Relay outputs a “lower” command and the transformer reacts with a higher tap-change.

Possible causes of the error: The raise and lower signals have been confused or the motor drive is behaving inversely.

Inverse behaviour implies that the Relay increases the transformer ratio in the event of a higher tap-change, thus lowering the voltage.

In most cases, it is to be expected that an increase in the tap-change position results in a higher voltage, whereas a decrease in the tap-change position results in a lower voltage.

Remedy: Exchange the raise and lower signals

2. No tap-change

Example:The Relay outputs a command, but the tap-change position does not change.

In this case, it must be assumed that either the position confirmation signal or the motor drive is defective.

3. Illogical tap-changes

If the next higher or lower tap-change position is not signalled back after the tap-change position has been raised or lowered, the Relay interprets the position check-back signal as being defective and sets the error flag TapErr.

We recommend assigning the error bit TapErr to a LED and/or a relay to inform the operating personnel about the status of the position check-back signal making it easier to rectify the error.

Page 280: ba_reg_d_gb

280

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

The Δcos ϕ emergency programFunctional principle:

In order to keep the circulating current regulation stable, even during bus faults (E-LAN), an emergency program is incorporated in the ΔI sin ϕ and ΔI sin ϕ (S) programs. This program is activated as soon as the Relay recognises a bus error (E-LAN - Error). All Relays connected to the E-LAN will return to their previous program 10 seconds after the bus error has been eliminated.

The Δcos ϕ program is used as an emergency program, whereby the regulation is not carried out to the entered cos ϕset but to the last current cos ϕSum** of the system that was measured by the Relay (ϕSum = angle between the sum current and the line voltage). Thus the voltage regulation is not affected and the parallel operation of the transformers also remains stable.

If the cos ϕSum of the network changes (an event that usually occurs only slowly, not suddenly), the line voltage changes only slightly, because the Relay tries to find a compromise between the minimum difference of the measured cos ϕSum* of the network and the current cosϕSum** of the network as well as the minimum difference between the command variable W and the actual value X of the voltage. This ensures that the parallel operation of the transformers remains stable.

Page 281: ba_reg_d_gb

281

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

16.10 Nominal transformation of the measuring transformers

The decisive factors for the nominal transformation ratio Kn of a measuring transformer are the nominal value X1n of the primary factor and the nominal value X2n of the secondary factor.

Knu = nominal transformation ratio of the voltage transformers

Kni = nominal transformation ratio of the current transformers

Nominal transformation of current transformersExample:

X 1n = 1000 AX 2n = 5 A

Nominal transformation ratio of the voltage transformersExample:

X1n = 110 kVX 2n = 100 V

Kn X 1nX 2n-----------=

Kni 1000 A5 A

------------------ 200= =

Knu 110 kV3

------------------ 100 V3

--------------- 110 kV100 V

------------------ 1100= =÷=

Page 282: ba_reg_d_gb

282

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

16.11 Self-conductEach active control level of the Relay (MANUAL/ AUTOMATIC) maintains its status even after a failure of the auxiliary voltage.

If the auxiliary voltage is interrupted, the “WITH” self-conduct setting causes the Relay to continue running in the AUTOMATIC operation mode after the event; this is only possible if the Relay was operating in the AUTOMATIC operation mode before the malfunction occurred. In the situation mentioned above, the “WITHOUT” self-conduct setting would cause the Relay to continue operating in the MANUAL operation mode after the event.

16.12 LCD display

16.12.1 LCD contrastThe contrast can be changed (see “LCD contrast (display)” on page 89).

16.12.2 LCD saverThe LCD display switches off after 1 hour.

16.12.3 Background illuminationThe background illumination switches off 15 minutes after the keypad was last used.

Pressing any key switches the background illumination on again.

Page 283: ba_reg_d_gb

283

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

17 Definition of the Abbreviations

Abbreviation Definition

OFF OFF

Trigger TriggerThe Relay stops further regulation until the limit value violation has been rectified

AUTO Automatic operation

Triple-wound Triple-wound application

ELAN Err E-LAN error (error on bus)

ELAN-L E-LAN left

ELAN-R E-LAN right

up/down LED indicates raise or lower, when control command is given.

InputErr Input-ErrorIf the setpoint value change (SW1 to SW2) is carried out at the binary input, InputErr will become active if both signals are there at the same time. The Relay retains the old value and displays InputErr.

TC-Err+ Temporary signal when tap-changer running time is exceeded

TC-Err. Permanent signal when the tap-changer running time is exceeded

TC. i. Op Maximum time TC in operation lampThe time the motor drive requires to change from one tap to the next

LDC Line drop compensation

Par-Prog Parallel program activated or not activated

Page 284: ba_reg_d_gb

284

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

ParErr ParrErr stands for a faulty parallel operation in general (parallel error) and automatically switches a group of transformers operating in parallel from the AUTOMATIC operation mode to the MANUAL operation mode.If this behaviour is not desired, a different type of behaviour can be selected via the SysCtrl feature. In this case please contact our headquarters.

ParrErr functions in different ways in the different parallel programs (See “Description of the regulation procedure” on page see “Description of the regulation programs” on page 266).

TapErr TapErr is a signal that indicates a problem with the tap-change position. The name is derived from the term “tap error”.Unlike ParErr, Tap Err is only effective locally, i.e. it is only indicated on the Relay on which the tap-changer position error has occurred. It can also switch the group working in parallel to MANUAL when operating in the master-slave or MSI procedure.

LEVEL Level-controlled

PROG Function triggered by background program

creepNBD Creeping net breakdown

Quick High-speed switchingThe Relay switches in the quickest possible time within the tolerance band.

Inh. Low Setting to a standstillThe Relay stops all further regulation until the limit value violation has been rectified

SP-1 Setpoint value 1

SP-2 Setpoint value 2

SP-3 Setpoint value 3

Abbreviation Definition

Page 285: ba_reg_d_gb

285

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

SP-4 Setpoint value 4

SP-decr. Decrease setpoint value via the binary input (lower)

SP-incr. Increase setpoint value via the binary input (raise)

SP2Level Level-controlled switching to setpoint value 2

Trans1/Trans1

Transit channel 1Binary input signal can be “handed over” to a relay (Rel 3 ... Rel 5).

Examples:BE 1 on Trans 1Rel 3 on Trans 1ã BE 1 = 1 ã REL 3 = 1

BE 1 = 0 ã REL 3 = 0

BE 1 on Trans 1Rel 3 on /Trans 1ã BE 1 = 1 ã REL 3 = 0

BE 1 = 0 ã REL 3 = 1

Trans2/Trans2

See Trans1

PG_CB Paragramer, low-voltage sideCircuit breaker

PG_IS1 Paragramer, low-voltage side,Disconnector 1

PG_IS2 Paragramer, low-voltage side,Disconnector 2

PG_CP Paragramer, low-voltage side,Bus Coupling

PG_SC1 Paragramer, low-voltage side,Bus tie 1

PG_SC2 Paragramer, low-voltage side,Bus tie 2

Abbreviation Definition

Page 286: ba_reg_d_gb

286

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

PG_H_CB Paragramer, high-voltage side,Circuit breaker

PG_H_IS1 Paragramer, high-voltage side,Disconnector 1

PG_H_IS2 Paragramer, high-voltage side,Disconnector 2

PG_H_CP Paragramer, high-voltage side,Bus Coupling

PG_H_SC1 Paragramer, high-voltage side,Bus tie 1

PG_H_SC2 Paragramer, high-voltage side,Bus tie 2

BCD1 BCD/BIN code, value 1

BCD2 BCD/BIN code, value 2

BCD4 BCD/BIN code, value 4

BCD8 BCD/BIN code, value 8

BCD10 BCD/BIN code, value 10

BCD20 BCD/BIN code, value 20

BCDminus BCD/BIN code, “-” sign

BIN16 BIN code, value 16

BIN32 BIN code, value 32

PANmiss Set if associated PAN - D is not available

Abbreviation Definition

Page 287: ba_reg_d_gb

287

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

LR_AH Local/remote operation together with the REG_LR device will be activated as soon as the input functions LR_AH and LR_STAT are used. These inputs are connected with the corresponding outputs of the REG_LR device. As long as the REG_LR device holds the status line LR_STAT active (1), the AUTO/MANUAL status of the Relay will be determined by the input LR_AH (1:AUTO, 0:MANUAL). Raise/lower commands may only come from the Relay drive (in the case of AUTO). As soon as the status of the REG_LR device falls (0), the Relay will revert to the AUTO/MANUAL operation mode which applied 1s before the drop in the LR_STAT signal. The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring will then continue to work as usual.Special case: LR_STAT is not used, i.e. only the input function LR_AH is activated. In this case, it is always assumed that LR_STAT is active.

LR_STAT If only the LR_STATUS input function is used, the following applies:LR_STAT active (1): Remote operation, i.e. MANUAL/AUTO and raise/lower only via inputs or REG-L.

LR_STAT inactive (0):Local operation, i.e. MANUAL/AUTO and raise/lower only via the keypad.

COM2ACT Outputs a 1 s signal as a pulse (relay) or lights the LED every 60 s

T60s/1s Gives information about the status of the COM 2 (1: busy, 0: not busy)

Abbreviation Definition

Page 288: ba_reg_d_gb

288

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

NoteFurther parameters and hence abbreviations are required in certain circumstances depending on the additionally selected features (e.g. TMM01/02).The descriptions of the statuses will be delivered with the appropriate operating manual update.

Page 289: ba_reg_d_gb

289

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

18 Symbols and their Definition

Symbol Definition

> I [%] Upper limit value of the current(of the transformer)

< I [%] Lower limit value of the current(of the transformer)

> U [%] Upper limit value of the voltage(of the transformer)

< U [%] Lower limit value of the voltage(of the transformer)

ΔI [A] Difference between 2 current values

ΔU [V] Difference between 2 voltage levels

AA1 ... AA4 Analogue output (mA)

AE1 ... AE4 Analogue input (mA)

BA1 ... BA4 Binary output(USt. : 10 V ... 50 V)

E1 ... E16 Binary input(USt. : 48 V ... 230 V)

Ft [1] Time factor for time behaviourof the Relay

I1n [A] Nominal value of the primary current transformer(of the transformer)

I2n [A] Nominal value of the secondary current transformer(of the transformer)

Icirc [A] Circulating current in parallel-switched transformers

Icirc sin ϕ [A] Reactive component of the circulating current Icirc

I [A] Deliverd load current of the transformer

I sin ϕ = Ib [A] Reactive component of the load current(short reactive current Ib)

Page 290: ba_reg_d_gb

290

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Kni [1] Ratio of the current transformer

Knu [1] Ratio of the voltage transformer (of the transformer)

R1 ... R8 Relay outputs

S [VA] Apparent power

Sn [VA] Nominal power of the transformer

St [%] Gradient of the Uf/I characteristic line

Gnom [%] Nominal value of the gradientof the Uf/I characteristic line

tb [s] Basic time; standard value for tb = 30 s for Xwb = 1 %

tV [s] Reaction delay of a control command

U1n [kV] Nominal value of the primary voltage transformer

U2n [V] Nominal value of the secondary voltage transformer

Uf [V] Voltage drop (amount) on the line

Uf [V] Voltage drop (pointer) on the line

Uact Actual value of the voltage

uk [%] Short-circuit voltage of the transformer; component of the nominal voltage, which operates in the nominal current in the short-circuited secondary winding

Uset Setpoint value of the voltage

UT [V] Voltage at the transformer(r.m.s value)

UV [V] Voltage at the consumer(r.m.s value)

W [V] Command variable (XR + XK)

Symbol Definition

Page 291: ba_reg_d_gb

291

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

X [V] Present value of the command variable(of the voltage)

X0 Reference value for limit values(setpoint value or 100/110 V)

Xd [V, %] Regulation difference (negative regulative deviation: Xd = - Xw)

XK [V] Correction quantity (Uf)

XR [V] Setpoint value, set on the Relay

XR100 [V]: Setpoint that is defined as the 100% value.

Xw [%] (relative) Regulative deviation[(X - W) / W] 100 %

Xw [V] (absolute) Regulative deviation (X - W)

Xwb [%] Rated relative regulative deviation; control commands are activated when Xwb = 1%

Xwz [%] Permissible regulative deviation, set on the Relay; indication in ± n% in relation to W

Y [1] Correcting variable 1 tap

Yh [1] Setting range Number of tap-changes

Z [V] Influencing variable

Symbol Definition

Page 292: ba_reg_d_gb

292

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

19 Parameters

Parameters Factory Setting

SettingRange

Reference

Trigger 125.0 V 100 V ... 150 V −

Actual value correction voltage

0.0 -20% ... +20% Unom

Actual value correction current

0.0 -20% ... +20% Inom

Kni 1.00 0.01 ... 10000 −

Knu 1.00 0.01 ... 4000 −

Regulative deviation, permissible

2% 0.1% ... 10% Setpoint value

Backward high-speed switching

10.0% 0% ... +35% Setpoint value

Forward high-speed switching

-10.0% -35% ... 0% Setpoint value

Setpoint value 100 V 60 V ... 140 V −

Gradient 0.0% 0% ... 40%

Inhibit Low -25% -75% ... 0% Setpoint value or100/110 V

Undervoltage < U -10.0% -25% ... +10% Setpoint value or100/110 V

Overvoltage > U 10% 0% ... + 25% Setpoint value or100/110 V

> I 100.0% 0% ... 210% Inom

1 A / 5 A

< I 0.0% 0% ... 100% Inom

1 A / 5 A

Time factor 1.0 0.1 ... 30 −

Trigger time 0 s 0 ... 999 s −

Backward high-speed switching time

0 s 0 ... 999 s −

Page 293: ba_reg_d_gb

293

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

Forward high-speed switching time

2 s 2 ... 999 s −

Inhibit low time 0 s 0 ... 999 s −

Undervoltage time 0 s 0 ... 999 s −

Overvoltage time 0 s 0 ... 999 s −

Time > I, < I 0 s 0 ... 999 s −

Parameters Factory Setting

SettingRange

Reference

Page 294: ba_reg_d_gb

294

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

20 Notes on the Interpreter Language

Notes on the Interpreter Language REG-L (REG-Language) can be ordered separately or can be downloaded from our website www.a-eberle.de orwww.regsys.de

Furthermore, all help texts may be displayed directly on the Relay using a terminal program (? ).

Page 295: ba_reg_d_gb

REG - D™

295Operating Manual REG - D™

21 Index

Symbols“++” symbols 146

Numbers1. Setpoint 105100% value 1052. Setpoint 10624 hour load curve 2572-wire line 96, 2603 conductor circuit 1844-wire line 2604-wire transmission technology (RS485) 96

AAbbreviations 283Absolute limits 239Active component 224Active current 277Actual value 48, 221Actual value correction current 292Actual value correction voltage 292Actuator 221Add-Ons 118Addresses (A ... Z4) 87Addressing 261Adjuisting the setpoint 222Analogue channels 198Analogue input 289Analogue module 33Analogue output 289Angle 132, 224Angle difference 225Apparent power 290Application menu 184ARON circuit 49, 132AUTO 45, 283Automatic 283Auxiliary voltage 9, 28Auxilliary voltage failure 123, 282

BBackground illumination 282Background information 221Background program 95, 138, 140, 142, 222, 236, 261, 284Backward high-speed switching 114, 292Backward high-speed switching time 292Band boundaries 251Band violation 251Basic settings 87Basic time 245, 290Battery 218Battery status 99Baud rate 211Baudrate 209BCD coding 32, 122Binary outputs 22, 236Block diagram 20Booster 97, 260Broadcast Message 261Bus 258Bus configuration 96Bus device index 261Bus error 148Bus errors 280Bus left 96Bus line 96Bus link 278Bus repeater 258Bus right 96Bus segment 260Bus station 258, 260, 261Busbar 221, 262, 263, 265, 266, 271Busbar replica 54

CCalming of the network 242Cause of fault 235Channel display 55Characteristic line 226, 227, 246Circuit breakers 152

Page 296: ba_reg_d_gb

REG - D™

296 Operating Manual REG - D™

Circulating current 262, 264, 266, 289Circulating current regulation 262, 263, 264, 278, 280COM 1 35, 93COM 2 33, 94COM 3 33Command variable 221, 222, 225, 245, 262, 280, 290Compromise 280Condensation 220Connection diagram 14, 150Consumer 223Continuous message 120Contrast 282Control 221Control command 240Control Influence 108Control level 282Control procedure 250Control quality 221Control system 94Controlled system 221Controlling the tap-changer 46Correction quantity 223, 291Coupling 171Couplings 152Creeping Net Breakdown

Recognition 128Creeping net breakdown 128, 242, 284

Lock Time 128Number of Changes 129Time slice 129

creepNBD 284Crosslink 54Crosslinking 262Current Display 123Current influence 110, 262Current loop 185Current range 135Current source 185Current strength 223Current transformer 223, 227, 289Current-dependent influencing 262

DData transfer. 214Date 55DCF77 94Δcos ϕ - procedure 263Δcos ϕ emergency program 280Δcos ϕ procedure 277Deadband 221Delete total number of tap-changes 91Deleting Passwords 90Demo mode 58ΔI sin ϕ - procedure 263ΔI sin ϕ (S) - procedure 263ΔI sin ϕ (S) procedure 270ΔI sin ϕ procedure 266Difference 280, 289Dimensions 12Direction of the active power 226Disconnector 152Display modes 45, 48

Recorder mode 48Regulator mode 48Statistics mode 48Transducer mode 48

Dual display 51, 55

EEarthing clamp 36Editing of the signal 235E-LAN 33, 96, 258, 265, 280ELAN Err 283E-LAN error 127E-LAN error (error on bus) 283E-LAN interfaces 96E-LAN left 283E-LAN right 283ELAN-L 283ELAN-R 283Emergency program 280Equalisation of the tap-change positions 178Error detection 185Error flags 181, 267, 272Exceeding the measurement range 185

Page 297: ba_reg_d_gb

REG - D™

297Operating Manual REG - D™

FFault signals 55Faults 235Feature K1 172Feature M+ 128Feature M2 49, 132Feedback effect 135Feeding point 53Feedrate speed 51, 57Firmware-Version 99, 151Fluctuation range 233Fluctuations in the line voltage 233Forward high-speed switching 114, 292Forward high-speed switching time 293Front panel 12Full load 228, 229Function keys 45Fuse 9Fuse selection 219

GGradient 111, 223, 228, 229, 262, 290, 292Gradient and limitation 110Group list 109, 173, 264, 266, 275Guide 36Guide value for Xwz 234

HHardware handshake 209Harmonics 135Hexadecimal number 99higher-level systems 94High-speed switching 240, 284High-speed switching when undervoltage/overvoltage occurs 114How to change fuses 218Humidity 220Hyperbolic characteristic curve 247, 248

II Current limit 112ID data of the REG-D regulator 99Illogical tap changes 183

Illogical tap-changes 269, 273, 276, 279Increments in the wrong direction 182Inh. Low 284Inhibit low 239, 241, 284, 292Inhibit low time 293Input assignments 138Input channel 138Input quantity 236InputErr 283Integrating time programs 250Integrator 221, 233Interfaces 33

JJumper 135

KKni 292Knu 292

LLamp check 54Language selection 125LCD contrast 89, 282LCD display 44, 282LCD Display Recorder Mode 44LCD Saver 282LCD saver 124LDC 283LDC-Parameter R 110LDC-Parameter X 110LED 283LED assignments 141LEDs 43, 45LEVEL 284Level detection 185Level-controlled activation 157Level-controlled switching 285Limit base 129Limit signal 236limit signal 236Limit signal <I 238Limit signal >I 238Limit signal >U 237

Page 298: ba_reg_d_gb

REG - D™

298 Operating Manual REG - D™

Limit signal trigger 236Limit value 289Limit value violation 236Limitation 108, 111, 227Limit-value transmiter <U 238Line data 260Line drop compensation 224, 283Line length 260Line resistance 92Line voltage 221, 280Lineare characteristic line 249Load 223Load changes 251Load current 222, 262, 289Load point 224, 225Load situation 251Loading procedure 252Local 45Lock control command 23Lock Time 242Locking filter 135LOGBOOK memory 101Loop resistance 260LOWER 236

MMaintenance 217Maintenance and repair works 10Manual (M) 45Manual/Automatic 22, 121

Bistable switching behaviour 121Flip/Flop switching behaviour 121

Master (M) 170Master-Slave independent 170Master-Slave procedure 170, 263, 274Maximum tap difference 130Maximum tap-change difference 244Maximum TC lamp time 240Maximum time TC in operation 120Measurement quantity 243Measurement Value Simulation 46Measurement value simulation 143Measuring circuit 219Measuring current (AC) I 29Measuring transformers 281

Measuring voltage UE 28Medium voltage networks 243Membrane keypad 43Memory 51MENU 46Menu selection 47Minimisation of the reactive circulating cur-rent 264MMU display 55Monitoring algorithm 178Monitoring of extreme operation values 235Monitoring tasks 235Monitoring the tap-changer 244Motor drive 120Motor protection switch-off 140Mounting rack 36MSI 170, 172MSI_Ind 174MSI_Ma 174MSI_Sl 174Multimaster 258Multimaster structure 260

NNet-cosϕ 109NO contact 22No increment 183No tap-change 269, 273, 276, 279Nominal power 263, 266, 270Nominal power of the transformer 109, 263Nominal transformation 281Nominal transformation of measuring transformers 281Nominal transformation ratio of the voltage transformers 281Nominal translation of current transformers 281Nominal value of the gradient 227Nominal voltage 227, 229Non-fused earthed conductor 9Number of changes 221, 233

Page 299: ba_reg_d_gb

REG - D™

299Operating Manual REG - D™

OOFF 283Open ring 258Operating panel 260Operation control elements 43Operation mode 176Operation Principle 47Oscillations 267, 271Output 221Output level 258Overvoltage 112, 292Overvoltage time 293

PPAN-D 98, 213PAN-D Voltage Monitoring Unit 98PAN-D voltage monitoring unit 98Paragramer 53Parallel operation 280Parallel program 107, 130, 283Parallel program activation 126Parallel regulation program 263Parallel switching 147, 150, 170, 262, 265Parallel transformer regulation 107Parallel-switching of transformers 263Parameter for parallel program 108Parameter menus 108Parameterisation 45, 102Parameters 292ParErr 181, 284Par-Prog 283Password 90, 91Password request 90, 91Past values 51People-process-communication (MPK) 43Permanent signal 265, 283Permissible circulating currents 264Permissible Icirc 267Permissible regulative deviation 48, 103, 233, 234Phase voltage 132Pin assignment 20Place number 36

Plausibility 236Plug-in modules 12

Configuration 12Degree of protection 12Height 12Location of blade connectors 13Location of socket connectors 13Picture dimensions 12Plug-in connector 12Weight 12Width 12

Pointers 225Position of the deadband 173, 274Primary side 228Primary value 105Primary voltage 222, 251Procedure for determining measurement values 247PROG 284Programming and parameterisation soft-ware 11Programs 107Progress bar 252Pulse-controlled activation 157

QQuasi-analogue scale 50Quick 284

Rr.m.s. value 224, 290RAISE 237Rating factor 245Reactance 224Reaction delay 240, 247Reaction time 245Reactive circulating current 262, 263, 264, 266Reactive component of circulating current 264Reactive component of the load current 267Reactive current 266, 267, 271, 277, 289Reactive current difference 278

Page 300: ba_reg_d_gb

REG - D™

300 Operating Manual REG - D™

Record 258Recorder display 51Recorder mode 51Reference value 291Reference value for the limit values 239Reflections 260REG-5A/E 248REG-D current consumption 219REG-IN1 99REG-IN2 100REG-L 236Regulating procedure 147Regulating quantity 233, 291Regulation behaviour time factor 103Regulation criteria 262Regulation difference 233, 291Regulation program 263, 265, 266Regulation result 277Regulative deviation 48, 221, 233, 234, 242, 245, 291, 292Regulator mode large display 124Relative humidity 220Relative Limits 239Relay 22Relay assignments 139Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring inhibit low when undervoltage occurs 115Relay outputs 290Remote 45Repeater 258Resetting Fault Signals 55Resetting the measured value memory 91Resetting the tap-counter 91Resistance input 184Resistance measurement equipment 184Reulation behaviour 103Rotating memory 101Running time exceeded 283Running time of the motor drive 120

SSafety regulations 9Scale section 57Scope of delivery 11

Secondary factor 281Secondary side 228Secondary value 105Secondary winding 290Self-Conduction of the Operation Mode

WITH 123Self-conduction of the operation mode 123

WITHOUT 123Set of curves 248Setpoint 48, 105, 127Setpoint adjustment 127Setpoint deviation 48Setpoint value 221, 222, 228, 229, 285, 292Setpoint value 1 284Setpoint value 2 284Setpoint value 3 284Setpoint value 4 285Setpoint value correction 234Setpoint value reduction 229Setting inhibit low if I 130Setting values 229Settings recommendation 254Setup menu 54Short circuit voltage 263, 266, 267, 270, 271, 290Short-form operating manual 11Signal level 97Simulated current 145Simulated phase angle 145Simulated tap-change 146Simulated voltage 145Simulation mode 144Simulation time 144Simulator for the quantities U, I, and j 144Slave (S) 170Small voltage deviations 245SP-1 284SP-2 284SP2Level 285SP-3 284SP-4 285SP-decr. 285SP-incr. 285

Page 301: ba_reg_d_gb

REG - D™

301Operating Manual REG - D™

Spur line lengths 260Standard value 290Standard version 28Standby mode 171Start bootstrap loader 211Station ID 87Station name 88Statistics mode 53Status 22, 45, 99Storage 218, 220Sum current 262, 280Switching difference 236Switching hysteresis 236Switching operations 151Switching problems 178Switching status 160Switching statuses 54, 152Switching time delay 235, 246Switching to a setpoint value 222, 283Symbols 289Synchronising the time 94System identification 99

TTap-change 48, 122, 234, 262, 264

OFF 122Tap-change adjustment 151Tap-change command 251Tap-change difference 264Tap-change equalisation procedure 170Tap-change in operation lamp 283Tap-change operation 250Tap-change procedure 221Tap-change signal 269, 273, 277, 279Tap-change voltage 221Tap-changer 221, 235, 240, 241, 244Tap-changer drives 240Tap-changer in operation time 240Tap-changer running time 283Tap-changes in the wrong direction 268, 273, 276, 279Tap-changes under load 53Tap-changing transformer 48, 222TapErr 181, 284TC. i. Op 283

TC-Err+ 283TC-Err. 283Technical data 12Telegram length 258Temperature range 220Temporary message 120Temporary signal 283Terminal voltage 262Terminate 97Terminating resistor 96, 260Three-tap-change regulator 221Time 55, 89Time > I 293Time axis 52Time behaviour 103, 104, 221, 245Time delay

< U 116> I, < I limit value 116> U 115Backward high-speed switching 117Forward high-speed switching 117Inhibit low 118Trigger 116

Time factor 103, 245, 257, 292Time program 104Time range 51Time reference line 55Time search 55Time sequence 240Tolerance band 51, 233, 245Topology 260Trans 285Transducer mode 49Transformer 151, 221, 229, 234Transformer configuration 150Transformer group list 263, 265Transformer mounting 131

Current 134Current (conversion 1 A / 5 A) 135Current transformer mounting ratio 137Voltage 132Voltage transformer ratio 134

Transformer ratio 290Transformer tap-change position 234

Page 302: ba_reg_d_gb

REG - D™

302 Operating Manual REG - D™

Transit channel 285Transmission lengths 97Transmission line 260Transmission rate 258, 260Trend memory 104, 251Trigger 113, 283, 292Trigger time 292Triple-wound application 283Trouble-shooting 181Types of lines 260

UUf/I characteristic line 290Undervoltage 111, 292Undervoltage side 262Undervoltage time 293Unit time 250Up/down 283Update of the operating software 209User 90

VVariable command variable 222, 223V-circuit 28Voltage band 250Voltage change 228Voltage deviation 250Voltage difference 224Voltage drop 221, 222, 223, 224, 225, 290Voltage measurement input 185Voltage pointer 224Voltage regulation 262, 264Voltage return 123Voltage stability 264Voltage transformer 28Voltage transformer ratio 131Voltage value 55Voltage-time diagram 55

WWarnings and Notes 9Weak load 228, 229WinREG 11, 58, 88, 143, 174, 258

Wire jumper 22, 23

ZZero modem cable 209

Page 303: ba_reg_d_gb

303

REG - D™

REG - D™ Operating Manual

22 Appendix��

��

� ��

��

0 �

��

��

��1!

���!

2 �

'

������

��%��

������������34!

4����4!

4�����������%������

(��������

)&�*+,

1�

11

11

1�

��

��

1�

����������������

1�

��

��

��

��

�-

�.

�/

����������������

�+

�+

�+

�+

�+

�+

�+

�+

��

$$

##

**,-,-,�,�,$,$,#,#

4��3����5

��%��

������

4

����

����

�*+�*+,

��

��

��

�-

����

��

'4

'4

��"�� �����

'�

" 67

'4

�*+�*+,

)#

)�

)$

)6

)�

),

�%&��0����*+�*+,�������

1�

11

11

1�

��

��

1�

1�

�*

�8

�#

��

�$

�6

��

�, �������������

'4

��1!

���!

�)���6����$�������������������',9'�9'�!

),$

(,,� (,

),�

),,

),-

):

)*

)8

),6

�+

��

+�

�+

��

+�

�+

��

+�

�+

��

+�

6�6-6-

�$�����-,*,*,#,$,$,�,-,-*

##

$�

��*�#�#

����

4���������

�%������

;'$

<'6

='�

9',

����������

���������

����������

����������

����

����

��%��

������

������������

�������

�����������������

�������������

�� ��

�1���

�1���

�� �

)�>�?

�'(��

�1���

@� �?

�'(�)

� #�

�-

��

��6�

�*

6- �-

�$

��

$�

�$

,-

**

,-

,$

,$

,#

,#

�-

�-

�#

�$

��

++

��

++

�+

�+

�+

�+

�+

�+

�+

�+

�+

�+

�+

�+

,#,#,$,$,�,�,-,-*

*#

#$

$�

��*6�6-

++

++

#*,-,�

��

++

��

+

+

�+

�+

��

+�

+

$�

�$,-*

*,-,$,$,#,#�-�-���$��

��

��

,�

,-

*#

++

++

,�

,-

*#

��

��

6�

6-

6�

6-

++

��

�-�

��

�-

�$

��

++

��

�$+